JP5835176B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Recently, in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, only setting a plurality of movable won game, while operating each movable won game, there are those made various effect.

JP 2012-85862 A

Although it is expected that the number of movable accessories will increase in the future, there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessories cannot operate properly .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately operating a plurality of movable accessories.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided for a plurality of movable accessories provided in a game area and each movable accessory for operating the corresponding movable accessory. Drive means , display means for displaying an effect image as the game progresses, and effect image setting means for setting the effect image to be displayed on the display means, the plurality of movable roles For each item, setting means for setting the operation of the movable combination, determination unit for determining the operation status of the plurality of movable combinations, and setting the operation for one movable combination by the setting unit are set. A determination means for determining whether or not the operation of the one movable accessory is to be non-executed based on a determination result by the determination means; and the one movable accessory by the determination means In a situation where the behavior of If you are a non-execution unit that the non-execution of drive of the drive means can be operated corresponding to the one of the movable won game set by the setting means, said plurality of movable won game is non Including a first movable accessory that is difficult to be visually recognized by a player during driving and is visible to the player at a position covering a part of the display unit by driving of the corresponding driving unit; When the operation of the first movable combination is set by the setting means, the first movable combination is covered with the first movable combination in a state where the first movable combination is operated by driving of the corresponding drive means. the position of the display means, to set to display an image corresponding to the operation of the first movable won game.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a plurality of movable accessories provided in the game area, a driving means provided for each movable accessory for operating the corresponding movable accessory, and the progress of the game Display means for displaying an effect image in accordance with the effect image setting means for setting the effect image to be displayed on the display means, and for each of the plurality of movable accessories, A setting means for setting an action of an object, a determination means for determining an operation state of the plurality of movable accessories, and the determination when the setting means is set to operate one movable accessory. Based on the determination result by the means, a determination means for determining whether or not the operation of the one movable accessory is to be non-executed, and the operation of the one movable accessory is not executed by the determination means If the situation should be, the setting means Non-execution means for non-execution of driving of the drive means corresponding to the one movable combination set to be operated more, and the plurality of movable combinations are difficult to see from the player when not driven And a first movable accessory that is visible to the player at a position covering a part of the display means by driving of the corresponding drive means, and the effect image setting means is When the operation of the first movable accessory is set, the position of the display means covered by the first movable means in a state where the first movable accessory is operated by driving of the corresponding driving means, Since it is set to display an image according to the operation of the first movable combination, there is an effect that a plurality of movable combinations can be operated appropriately.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the 1st accessory descends. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the 2nd accessory goes up. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in a main controller, (b) showed typically the various data stored in ROM in a main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main controller, various reservation ball storage areas, and various reservation ball execution areas. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (c) is the variation pattern table for jackpots FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 9E is a diagram of a variation (probability) variation pattern table. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the action operation start command in relation to the movable action in operation. It is the figure which showed whether the operation | movement of the movable accessory instruct | indicated operation | movement start by is performed or not performed. (A) is a figure which shows the image displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in operation | movement of a 1st accessory, (b) is a 1st accessory with respect to a display control apparatus from an audio lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device when a command for not executing an action indicating that is not executed is transmitted. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation completion determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation | movement interference determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation non-execution command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the image displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus, when it is determined in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment to operate | move a 1st accessory in a certain operation | movement aspect.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment.

  1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 2 shows a state where the first accessory 87 provided in the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. 3 shows a state in which the second accessory 88 provided on the variable display device 80 of the pachinko machine 10 is lifted so as to cover a part of the lower side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and an entrance to a first entrance 64 or a second entrance 640 (to be described later) Various effects such as a change effect and a reach effect that are performed along with the start / start prize are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “town stage” with a town motif, a “sea stage” with a sea motif, a “mountain stage” with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the changing effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means such as LED (Light Emitting Device). In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. However, when the stop switch 51b is pressed, the ball is stopped from firing during the pressing operation. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails and windmills, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. It is configured by assembling the mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is done. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back so as to flow down on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the game area while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 is disposed in the upper right portion of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (to be described later) that performs main control of the game, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. .

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to having entered into the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  As will be described in detail later, during probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  On the left side of the game area as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 2), there is provided a general winning opening 63 through which ten balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area.

  In the variable display device unit 80, the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with three movable accessories for a notice effect such as a first accessory 87, a second accessory 88, and a third accessory 89.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these three symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and is an illustration of an actual display screen. FIG. 5 schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting together.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is “big hit”, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is the third symbol display device. It is performed at 81, and is configured so that a jackpot is generated after the variation effect is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (also referred to as “high-probability symbol” and “probability variation symbol”) to which odd numbers are added are arranged. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols (also referred to as “low probability symbols” and “normal symbols”) to which even numbers are added are arranged.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

  The variation display area Dm is an area where a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. In the variable display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 stages are displayed in the variable display area Dm.

  Here, the middle part of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set as an effective line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the effective lines are in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in the present embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, etc. on the back side or the front side of the third symbol, and displays a notice effect while the change effect is being performed in the change display area Dm. This is an area for displaying various effect images by displaying a jackpot effect.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the current fluctuating effect, so that the player can know the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the content of the image displayed in the notice effect It has become. In the present embodiment, as an aspect of the notice effect, the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are operated and light-emitted while the movable accessories 87 to 89 are operated. An aspect is also prepared in which an image that emphasizes movement and light emission is displayed in the effect display area Db, thereby notifying the player of the expected degree of winning. The player can increase the expectation that is a big hit by viewing the notice effect executed during the change effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 is prepared from a variation effect with a short variation time to a variation effect with a long variation time, and the notice effect is configured to be executed more as the variation effect has a longer variation time. This is because if the variation time of the variation effect is long, the player may be bored until it is stopped and displayed, and the player is executed every time the announcement effect is displayed. Can have a sense of expectation for jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player and continue playing the game.

  The holding display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Yes, it is divided into a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of balls held for the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 is displayed.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the first reserved display area Ds1. In addition, even when a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the second hold display area Ds2.

  In the first holding display area Ds1 and the second holding display area Ds2, one holding ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each holding ball number, and the number of the holding ball number symbols is displayed. The number of balls on hold is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, it indicates that the number of held balls for the first entrance 64 is one, and 4 in the second reserved display area Ds2. When the number of reserved balls is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is four.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls ("●" symbol) is not displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the corresponding entrance 64,640 is 0. It indicates that there is no reservation ball. The player can grasp the number of held balls that are held at that time from the number of held balls displayed in the held display area Ds.

  In place of the display of the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 are respectively included as part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in numbers. In addition, a certain area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and another region in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. May be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the door frame 12, or the like is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holdings are provided, and the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 and the holding ball for the second entrance 640 are determined according to the number of on-holding lamps. It is good also as what displays a number.

  Returning to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-like movable accessory in a front view of the game area, and is used for a notice effect. The first accessory 87 is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 when the game area is viewed from the front during normal times, and is not visible to the player. And when the variation effect of the 3rd symbol currently performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 becomes a big hit, the 1st actor 87 is made into a center frame at arbitrary timings during the variation effect being performed. By lowering from 86 and rotating in the clockwise direction (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2) of the game area, the player can visually recognize the first action 87 that has been rotated and becomes a big hit in the variation effect. A notice effect (so-called one-shot notice) is performed to give notice of this.

  In addition, an LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 87, and when the LED is turned on or blinked in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first accessory 87, the notice effect is provided. Is more emphasized. Further, in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the brightness around the first accessory 87 becomes high. Thereby, the notice effect by the 1st actor 87 is further emphasized.

  A first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a (see FIG. 6) and a first accessory rotation motor 87b (see FIG. 6) for operating the first accessory 87 are connected to the first accessory 87. The pachinko machine 10 drives the first action vertical solenoid 87a and the first action rotation motor 87b to lower the first action 87 from the center frame 86 while rotating, Perform a notice effect. The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b is a sound to be described later for controlling sound output, lighting and turning off of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. This is performed by the lamp controller 112. Details of drive control of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second accessory 88 (FIG. 3) is a plate-like movable accessory in the front view of the game area, and is used for the notice effect as with the first accessory 87. In the second accessory 88, the characters “Millionaire” are written on the front side in front view (side on which the player can see).

  The second accessory 88 is stored inside the lower side of the center frame 86 when the game area is viewed from the front during normal times, and is not visible to the player. Then, when the 3rd symbol variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the timing when it has developed into a special reach with a very high expectation level that is a big hit, or once in the middle of the variation effect is temporarily dismissed When the symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the reverse effect is performed again, the second effect 88 is raised from the center frame 86 for a predetermined time, thereby allowing the player to change to the second effect 88. A notice effect is made to visually recognize the characters of “Millionaire”. With the notice effect by the second actor 88, the player expects that the degree of expectation that is expected to become a jackpot by the development of special reach or the expectation that is expected to be a jackpot by the reverse effect is further increased. Suggests.

  The second accessory 88 is connected to a second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a (see FIG. 6) for operating the second accessory 88, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the second accessory vertical movement solenoid. By driving 88a, the second accessory 88 is raised from the center frame 86, and a notice effect is performed. The drive control of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is performed by an audio lamp control device 112, which will be described later, in the same manner as the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b. Details of the drive control of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The third accessory 89 is a cylindrical movable accessory, and the character of “one-time reversal” is decorated on the side surface of the cylinder, and similarly to the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88. , Used for notice production. The third accessory 89 is located on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81 so that the cylindrical side surface can be viewed in front view of the game area, with the center axis of the cylinder shape up and down in front view of the game area. It is attached to the center frame 86 in parallel with the direction. Further, the third accessory 89 has a center frame 87 so as to rotate clockwise (in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 2) when the rotation axis is viewed from above the gaming machine with the central axis of the cylinder as the rotation axis. Is attached. Further, the third accessory 89 has an LED (not shown) built therein so that the letter “one-shot reversal” shines in one of blue, yellow and red.

  In the normal state, the third accessory 89 is maintained in a stopped state, and the characters “one-shot reversal” are also in a non-light-emitting state. Then, when the 3rd symbol display effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the timing at which the reach occurs, the timing at which the super-reach with a high expectation level which is a big win is developed, or the big hit than the super reach Rotate the third accessory 89 for a specified time while turning on or flashing “one-shot reversal” in blue, yellow, or red at a timing that has evolved into a highly anticipated special reach. And a notice effect is performed. This notice effect by the third actor 89 suggests to the player that the degree of expectation that is expected to be a big hit due to the occurrence of reach or the development to super reach or special reach is further increased.

  Also, depending on the color of the “one-shot reversal”, specifically, “one-shot reversal” light emission so as to increase the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the order of blue → yellow → red The color is determined. As a result, the increase in the degree of expectation that is a big hit suggested to the player can be changed depending on the color of the character “one-shot reversal”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the character color of “one-shot reversal”, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced by the color of the character. Therefore, the game can be continued without getting the player bored.

  A third accessory rotating motor 89a (see FIG. 6) for rotating the third accessory 89 is connected to the third accessory 89, and the pachinko machine 10 is used for rotating the third accessory 89. By driving the motor 89a, the third accessory 89 is rotated to perform a notice effect. The drive control of the third accessory rotating motor 89a is performed in the same manner as the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a, the first accessory rotating motor 87b, and the second accessory up / down solenoid 88a. 112. Details of the drive control of the third accessory rotating motor 88a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although details will be described later, whether or not the notice effect is performed using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89 is a display for controlling the display of the third symbol display device 81. The controller 114 determines. This is because the display control device 114 determines the detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 including the notice effect, in other words, the display control. Depending on the detailed variation pattern determined by the device 114, it is determined whether or not to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89.

  In the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, the first that is determined to be used in the notice effect The display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of this as an accessory operation start command including the operation mode of the accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. Is. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the game area as viewed from the front, that is, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in FIG. 2). Part of the sphere that flows down is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed.

  After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display. The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the variation display of the second pattern is performed for the number of the spheres that are reserved. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37. Separately from the first symbol display device 37, a second symbol hold lamp for displaying the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the second symbol is displayed for the maximum reserved amount. The number of reserved balls may be indicated by providing four and keeping the second symbol holding lamps lit for the number of reserved balls. Further, the number of reserved balls may be displayed on a 7-segment display or may be displayed in a predetermined area of the third symbol display device 83.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “left-handed” sphere) launched so that the sphere passes through the left of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first entrance 64 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes the right side of 80 (the so-called “right-handed” ball).

  A second entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “right-handed” sphere) that is launched so that the sphere passes through the second entrance 640 to the right of the variable display device unit 80 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes through the left side of 80 (the so-called “left-handed” ball).

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is one of the entrances through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are calculated. Although configured in the same way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is one. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( In an enlarged state), and the sphere easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of the 15R probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball entering the second entrance 640 is the first entrance It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the ball entrance 64, and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Since the through gate 67 that triggers the lottery for the open state is arranged on the right side of the variable display device 80, the right side of the variable display device 80 is directed toward the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. If the ball is fired so that the ball passes through (right-handed) and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the ball entering the second entrance 640 is aimed to become a 15R probability variation big hit, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80 and below the through gate 67, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). When a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, a specific winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and 15 balls are paid out as winning balls.

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  In the left corner of the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small part of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83 (a second symbol winning lottery), and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The main control device 110 transmits commands for instructing various operations to a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. This is to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main control device 110 via a signal line connecting the main control board 110 and the sub control board.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 has a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Reserved ball counter 203e, universal reserved ball counter 203f, universal reserved ball counter 203g, universal reserved ball counter 203h, universal reserved ball storage area 203i, universal reserved ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag At least 203k.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d.

  Further, in the main control device 110, the main winning features of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in ROM 202, and various storage balls stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Although details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The stored special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the special figure reservation ball storage area 203b. Stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit. A first per-random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball is won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a game state for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) having a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. By differentiating the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” of the “gaming state” It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, there is a duplicate value between the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state”. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. As in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, the value of the random number that is a big hit is predicted. Since it can be made difficult to be done, fraud can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball in the RAM 203 together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect or the type of stop symbol (hereinafter “stop type”) Will be the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There are “15R normal jackpot”, which is a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and “4R probable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second pitch The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table for the “first entrance” is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type becomes a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second entrance 640 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the type of the big win is a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1 / 4R (25/100) with a probability of 4R.

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in any reserved area of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of departure. The

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the variation pattern, and is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 22).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 in FIG. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas.

  The MPU 201 determines variation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table 202d used at the time of loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal except for the shortage, or during the shortage or certain change. A use (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  Further, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time, A stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first per-random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, and the gaming state is in a short time or a certain probability variation. At this time, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202. It is determined from the 2.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

  Here, the various types of the reach reach are the change patterns with a short change time of 30 seconds, and the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the short reach (the so-called bitter stop pattern is aligned). . The various types of super reach are fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than normal reach types, and the first symbol (or third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). ). Special reach types are fluctuation patterns that have a longer variation time of 90 seconds than the super reach types, and the reach that takes the longest time (for example, the reach that develops after the super reach or the destination from the normal reach is the super reach) This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, the gaming state is normal, short-running, or short, like the variation pattern table 202d for losing (see FIGS. 9 (d) and (e)). The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different depending on the probability change.

  Specifically, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the game state is normal is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 for various types of special reach. ~ 198. On the other hand, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the gaming state is short or probable is 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is normal, various types of super reach and special reach having a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. On the other hand, when the gaming state is short-running or probabilistic, various types of normal reach having a short variation time are easily selected as variation patterns.

  During normal times, since the probability of winning a big hit is low, various types of super reach and special reach that have a long variation time are selected as the variation pattern, so that the variation production by various types of super reach and special reach is performed. , It can greatly expand the player's expectation that will be a big hit. On the other hand, during a short time or during a certain change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and a start winning is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if you select many variation patterns with a long variation time during a short time or certain change, it may take time to start the next variation production, giving the player a wait state, and may cause discomfort to the player There is. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a short time or a certain change, it is configured so that various types of normal reach having a shorter variation time than in the normal state can be easily selected, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is in a short time or a certain variation, various special reach types are not selected. Although details will be described later, the special reach types are not selected in the case of losing. In other words, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it means 100% jackpot. Here, during the probability change, it is a gaming state that will surely be a big win for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by special reach during the probability change, the variable effect ends earlier than the joy that became a big hit As a result, there is a strong dissatisfaction with the desire to shift to a special gaming state (a jackpot state). In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuating effect due to the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probability change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the game state is the same in the short-time and the probability change, and the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS 1 is the same. The association between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as the variation pattern during a short time. During the time shortage, it is not necessarily guaranteed that it will be a big hit, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the range, the first is obtained when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area It is determined from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a short lapse where the change ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long lapse that is longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but the reach is not established, Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, for reach, there are various types of normal reach where the reach is established but the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and various types of super reach where the fluctuation time is 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The normal reach ranges from 0 to 149 and the super reach ranges from 150 to 198.

  FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (e), the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of separation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the reach is determined to be other than the full-removal reach and short-reach and long-reach, and the reach other than the front-rear and front-rear reach, and the common reach with various types of normal reach and various types of super-reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the same reserved area when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is extracted from the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  The off-set (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a short time or during the probability change, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the time is short or probable, it will take time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a wait state, and making the player uncomfortable There is sex. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Also, in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 that are referred to in the case of an outage, various types of special reach that can be selected as a variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it is a 100% jackpot. Even in the case of jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of selection is also low at 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and a great pleasure can be given to the player when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for outliers shown in FIG. 9 (d) and FIG. 9 (e), when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is a counter used for the lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and provided in the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the first-fourth reserved-map areas in the reserved-ball storage area 203i.

  In the second random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, if the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (first symbol). 2), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values that can be won when the gaming state is short or probable is 250, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1-250”, it is determined that the game state is in a short time or a certain change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than the normal time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  In addition, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left-handed player) so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 than in the case where the ball is hit (rightward). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  Now, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 holding ball storage comprising four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 is shown. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the entrance to the second entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each reserved area provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64. First per random number counter storage area 203a1, first per type counter storage area 203a2, variation pattern selection counter storage area 203a3, variation type counter storage area 203a4 for storing the values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, respectively. have. Although not shown, each reserved area provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has a first random number obtained from the counter buffer by entering the second entrance 640. Storage areas for storing the values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are provided for each counter.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area. Stores the value. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  When there are two holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first and second areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding third area. Stores a value. When there are three holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first to third areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding fourth area. Stores a value. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the first entrance 64, the special figure 1 hold first area, the special figure 1 hold second It is possible to store in the order of area, special figure 1 reserved third area, special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, the stop Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 hold first area, the special figure 2 hold second The area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area can be stored in this order.

  In addition, when the start winning to the 1st entrance 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the 1st to 4th reserved areas in FIG. 1, the value of each counter at that time is detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, if the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas, The value is discarded without being held. In other words, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured such that the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. When there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the start timing of the variation effect, the first per random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first per random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a has a special figure 1 reservation first area. The first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CS1 stored therein are respectively set to the first per-random number counter provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. It is moved to the storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  Then, the value of each counter stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the above, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a. Value is transferred to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the start winning at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a lottery effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reservation 1st area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reservation ball 1st area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, After moving to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area is changed to a free special figure 1 holding first area or special figure. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is saved. One area of the storage area 203b is released. Further, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball is stored. One area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data may be shifted only for a reserved area in which (variable counter values) are stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. If only the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 holding first area is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 holding second area is transferred to the special figure 1 holding first area. The shift process may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a universal reserved ball storage area 203i comprising four reserved areas (normal map reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a ball in the through gate 67. ing. Each holding area has a second per-random number counter storage area 203i1 for storing the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67.

  The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i stores a second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the through gate 67. At this time, when there is no reservation in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and all of the general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the second random number counter C2 is stored in the general-purpose first reserved area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first area, the second random number in the general-purpose reserved second area Stores the value of the counter C4. If there are two holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to second areas, the second reserved random-number counter C4 is the second Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4. If there are three holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a and the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to third areas, the second reserved area in the general-purpose reserved fourth area Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4.

  As a result, in the order in which the passage of the sphere is detected in the through gate 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere is changed to the ordinary figure holding first area and the ordinary figure holding second. It is possible to store in the order of the area, the general map hold third area, and the general map hold fourth area. If the passing of a sphere is detected in the through gate 67 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-to-fourth reserved areas, the second hit at that time is detected. The value of the random number counter C4 is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with an ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general-purpose hold first area of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  Note that when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 in the first reserved area of the reserved figure in the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j, it is then stored in the second reserved area in the reserved figure. In addition, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant ordinary reservation first area. Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold third area is shifted to the free general-purpose hold second area, and the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold fourth area The value is shifted to the third area where the figure is reserved.

  As a result, when the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 reserved in the universal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is retained. One area of the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i is released.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between each reserved area (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserved area. However, each data in the reserved area (secondary area to fourth area) is shifted to an area with a smaller area number. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters) ) May be shifted only for the reserved area in which is stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area. If the data is stored, the data of the general map hold first area is shifted to the general map hold ball execution area 203j, and then the data of the general map hold second area is shifted to the general map hold first area. The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed in the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the customary reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are first entrances detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 16) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or on the second entrance 640 (start winning), the number of held balls (standby) of the variation effect (variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S1613 in FIG. 21). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a winning prize is detected and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command to hold the ball with a variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 held in the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the number and the value of the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect without accessing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10A, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2). (See the reserved ball number counter 223b). In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved balls in the changing effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 managed in the voice lamp control device 113 (see Fig. 1 reserved ball number counter 223a), and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls (figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is based on the variation pattern command. And updated at the timing of setting the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the timing of starting the variation effect). That is, if the starting variation effect is accompanied by a start winning at the first entrance 64, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the starting winning at the first entrance 64 is reduced by one and starting variation. If the effect is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is reduced by one.

  The main controller 110 determines whether the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64, Information indicating whether the start entry to the second entrance 640 is included is included. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information included in the variation pattern command, whether the variation effect to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64, or the start to the second entrance 640 Based on the result of the determination, the number of reserved balls in the changing production accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the change accompanying the starting winning to the second entrance 640 are determined. A process of reducing one of the number of reserved balls for production by 1 is performed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 changes. A display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the first hold display area Ds1, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown to the player.

  Also, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640 changes. A display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the second hold display area Ds2, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the second entrance 640 is shown to the player.

  The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether it is executed in accordance with the start winning to 640. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol type When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640.

  The special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the initial stage of setting the start of the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired with winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 18).

  In addition, when the execution timing of the change effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, whereas the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If the value of various counters that are greater than 0 and acquired with the start winning at the first entrance 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of various counters stored in the special figure 1 holding first area are shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see S1304 and S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 18). ).

  In the MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is performed by the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of execution of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), as a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) used for determining the jackpot type. Based on the figure type flag 203k, either “first entrance” or “second entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big win is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for “first entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for “second entrance” is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with the winning at the first entrance 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with winning the second entrance 640 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variable jackpot. In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case.

  Here, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a sphere can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 7A, a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, Controls the driving of the third actors 87 to 89. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, A two-piece article hand-way solenoid 88a, a third-piece rotation motor 89a, and the like are connected to each other.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits to the third symbol display device 81 a command related to a variation effect such as a variation pattern command and a stop type command received from the main control device 110. The display control device 114 determines a detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and uses the determined detailed variation pattern to determine the third variation pattern. A variation effect is executed by the symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display type command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Although details will be described later, the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a display type command. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display type command received from the display control device 114, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are responded to the accessory operation start command. Drive one of them. The accessory operation start command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113, and information on the type of the movable accessory that should start the operation (driving) and And information on an operation mode indicating how to operate.

  In the display control device 114, detailed execution modes (variation patterns) of the variation effects including the notice effect are based on the variation pattern commands, stop type commands, and the like received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. decide. At this time, according to the determined detailed variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, and its operation mode Is determined. Based on the determination, the display control device 114 is the timing of starting the operation of any one of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89, and the type of the movable accessory to be operated (the accessory type). A command for starting an accessory operation including information related to the information and its operation mode is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the ROM 222 stores the accessory driving control data for driving the corresponding movable accessory in the corresponding operation mode in association with the movable accessory type and the operation mode. For example, when five operation modes are set for the first accessory 87, the accessory drive control data for driving the first accessory 87 for each of the five operation modes is stored in the ROM 222. Similarly, when four operation modes are set for the second accessory 88 and three operation modes are set for the third accessory 89, four operations are performed for the second accessory 88. For each mode, the third accessory 89 stores the accessory drive control data for driving each movable accessory for each of the three operation modes in the ROM 222.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the accessory operation control data corresponding to the operation mode of the movable accessory type indicated by the accessory operation start command is read from the ROM 222, In accordance with the accessory driving control data, the movable accessory indicated by the movable accessory type is operated.

  When operating the first accessory 87, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory up / down moving solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87b in accordance with the accessory drive control data. When operating the second accessory 88, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a according to the drive pattern. When operating the third accessory 89, the sound lamp controller 113 drives the third accessory rotation motor 89a according to the drive pattern.

  The first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is a solenoid for moving the first accessory 87 in the downward direction of the game area. When the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is driven, the first accessory 87 stored in the center frame 86 is lowered and becomes visible to the player. In addition, when the driving of the first action vertical movement solenoid 87a is released (when the first action / action solenoid 87a is released), the first action 87 that has been visually recognized by the player rises and is stored in the center frame 86 again. As a result, the player becomes invisible.

  The first accessory rotation motor 87b is a motor for rotating the first accessory 87. When the first accessory rotation motor 87b is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates in the clockwise direction in the game area (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

  Here, the first hand 87 in the pachinko machine 10 is rotated while the first hand 87 is lowered and visible to the player. In the conventional pachinko machine, in such a case, as the accessory driving control data for operating the first accessory 87, the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the driving of the first accessory rotating motor 87b are performed. Both the pattern and the pattern are defined and stored in the ROM 222. Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, the designer designs both the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the drive pattern of the first accessory rotation motor 87b. This had to be a design burden. Moreover, since the accessory drive control data including the respective drive patterns must be stored in the ROM 222, there is a problem that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be pressed or the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. Then, the sound lamp control device 110 determines whether or not the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a is being driven, and when the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a is being driven, the first accessory rotation is performed. The motor 87b is driven. As a result, while the first accessory 87 is lowered and is visible to the player, the first accessory 87 can be rotated. And since the designer of the pachinko machine 10 has only to design the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a, the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. Only the driving pattern of the first accessory rotating motor 87b may be defined as the accessory driving control data of the one accessory 87. In this case, the sound lamp control device 110 determines whether or not the first accessory rotation motor 87b is being driven, and when the first rotation motor 87b is being driven, The solenoid 87a may be driven. Also by this, while the first accessory 87 is lowered and is visible to the player, the first accessory 87 can be rotated. Since the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to design the drive pattern of the first accessory rotating motor 87b, the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory rotating motor 87b is defined as the accessory driving control data and stored in the ROM 222, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  The second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is a solenoid for moving the second accessory 87 in a front view upward direction of the game area. When the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is driven, the second accessory 88 stored in the center frame 86 rises and becomes visible to the player. When the driving of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is released (when it is in a non-driven state), the second accessory 88 that has been visually recognized by the player is lowered and stored in the center frame 86 again. As a result, the player becomes invisible.

  The third accessory rotating motor 89a is a motor for rotating the third accessory 89. As described above, the third accessory 89 has a center frame with the center axis of the cylindrical shape parallel to the vertical direction of the game area when viewed from the front of the game area so that the side surface of the cylinder is visible in the front view of the game area. 87 is attached. When the third accessory rotation motor 89a is driven, the third accessory 89 rotates clockwise when the rotation axis is viewed from above the gaming machine with the central axis of the cylinder as the rotation axis (arrow B in FIG. 2). Direction).

  Next, details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a first character driving flag 223c, a second character driving flag 223d, a third character driving flag 223e, and an operating character number counter. 223f, an operation interference flag 223g, and an operation completed flag 223h.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the first symbol display device 37 (and third The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, and the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol) in accordance with the start winning to the second entrance 640. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls that have won the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, respectively. The number of held balls is managed by the ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64, and adds the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the addition of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is received. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance slot 64 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 25). reference).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 by adding the number of reserved balls of the variation effect by the start winning to the second entrance 640. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2010 of FIG. 25).

  On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted in the main control device 110. When the variation effect mode in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or to the second entrance 640. One value is subtracted from either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to whether the start winning prize is involved (see S2108 and S2110 in FIG. 26). Whether or not the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640 is indicated in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is included, and a determination is made based on the information.

  In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is updated, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a after the storage or update is to be notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 25 and S2109 in FIG. 26).

  In response to the reception of the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing of updating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the display control device 114 is notified of the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage or update. Then, the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2011 in FIG. 25 and S2111 in FIG. 26).

  When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113 is obtained. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls for the minute is displayed in the reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display areas Ds1 and Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the same as that of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The first accessory driving flag 223c is a flag indicating whether or not the first accessory up-and-down moving solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87b are driven to operate the first accessory 87. Indicates that the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b are driven, and when OFF, the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation are indicated. It shows that the motor 87b is not driven.

  The first accessory driving flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. In the sound lamp control device 113, the accessory operation start command indicating the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 is received from the display control device 114, and the accessory drive control data corresponding to the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command is set. When the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b are driven based on the accessory drive control data, the first accessory drive flag 223c is set to ON ( (See S2213 in FIG. 27). Further, based on the accessory driving control data, when the timing of stopping the operation of the first accessory 87 by stopping the driving of the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87b, The first accessory driving flag 223c is turned off (see S2304 in FIG. 30).

  The first accessory driving flag 223c is referred to in the accessory driving process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, and when the first accessory driving flag 223c is on, it is set according to the set accessory driving control data. Then, the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is driven (see S2302 in FIG. 30). Further, while the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is being driven, the first accessory rotating motor 87b is also driven by the accessory driving process executed by the MPU 21 (S2314 in FIG. 30). As a result, the first effect 87 is lowered and made visible to the player, and the first effect 87 is rotated so that a notice effect that increases the expectation level that the player feels a big hit is executed. . As described above, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to design the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and create the accessory driving control data, so the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a needs to be defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in storage capacity required for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  The second accessory driving flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is driven to operate the second accessory 88. It shows that the moving solenoid 88a is being driven, and when it is off, it indicates that the second accessory vertical moving solenoid 88a is not being driven.

  The second accessory driving flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. In the sound lamp control device 113, the accessory operation start command indicating the start of the operation of the second accessory 88 is received from the display control device 114, and the accessory driving control data corresponding to the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command is set. When the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is driven based on the accessory drive control data, the second accessory drive flag 223d is set to ON (see S2213 in FIG. 27). Further, the first accessory driving flag 223c is turned off when it is time to stop the operation of the second accessory 88 after finishing the driving of the second accessory up / down solenoid 88a based on the accessory driving control data. (See S2308 in FIG. 30).

  The second accessory driving flag 223d is referred to in the accessory driving process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, and when the second accessory driving flag 223d is on, it is set according to the set accessory driving control data. Then, the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is driven (see S2306 in FIG. 30). Thereby, the expectation degree which becomes the big hit which a player feels can be raised by raising the 2nd accessory 88 and making a player visually recognize it.

  The third accessory driving flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the third accessory rotating motor 89a is being driven to operate the third accessory 89. This indicates that the motor 89a for driving is being driven, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the third accessory rotating motor 89a is not being driven.

  The third accessory driving flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. In the sound lamp control device 113, the accessory operation start command indicating the operation start of the third accessory 89 is received from the display control device 114, and the accessory drive control data corresponding to the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command is set. When the third accessory rotating motor 89a is driven based on the accessory driving control data, the third accessory driving flag 223e is set to ON (see S2213 in FIG. 27). Further, based on the accessory driving control data, the first accessory driving flag 223c is turned off when it is time to stop driving the third accessory rotating motor 89a and stop the operation of the third accessory 89. (See S2312 in FIG. 30).

  The third accessory driving flag 223e is referred to in the accessory driving process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, and when the third accessory driving flag 223e is on, the third accessory driving flag 223e is set according to the set accessory driving control data. Then, the third accessory rotating motor 89a is driven (see S2310 in FIG. 30). Thereby, it is possible to increase a degree of expectation that is a big hit felt by the player by causing the player to visually recognize the rotation operation of the third accessory 89.

  Further, the first accessory driving flag 223c, the second accessory driving flag 223d, and the third accessory driving flag 223e are referred to by the operation completion determination process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the operation completion determination process is a process executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, and is included in the accessory operation start command. When the movable combination (first combination 87 to third combination 89) indicated by the combination type is an already operating combination, the combination operation start command is ignored and the combination operation start command is ignored. The movable accessory is continuously operated based on the accessory drive control data that has already been set before receiving.

  In the pachinko machine 10, processing in the display control device 114 is programmed so that a movable accessory that has already been operated is not newly instructed by an accessory action start command. However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and although it is originally another command, There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as a command for starting an action for an object. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, there is also a possibility that the display control device 114 may transmit the accessory action start command to the voice lamp control device 113 again for the movable accessory that is already operating.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device 113 performs display control in order to prevent a movable accessory that is operating in one operation mode from starting operation in another operation mode due to such a problem. If a movable accessory that is started by the received accessory operation start command is an active agent when the accessory operation start command is received from the device 114, the received accessory operation start command is Ignoring it, the movable accessory is continuously operated based on the accessory drive control data already set before receiving the accessory action start command.

  Specifically, when an operation start of the first accessory 87 is instructed by the received accessory operation start command, the value of the first accessory drive flag 87a is confirmed and the first accessory 87 is operating. Determine whether or not. If the first accessory 87 is operating, the received accessory operation start command is ignored, and the first accessory 87 continues to operate in the operation mode that is already in operation.

  In the case where the start of operation of the second accessory 88 is instructed by the received accessory operation start command, the value of the second accessory drive flag 88a is checked to determine whether or not the second accessory 88 is operating. To do. If the second accessory 88 is in operation, the received accessory operation start command is ignored, and the second accessory 88 continues to operate in the already operating mode.

  In the case where the operation start of the third accessory 89 is instructed by the received accessory operation start command, the value of the third accessory drive flag 89a is checked to determine whether or not the third accessory 89 is operating. To do. If the third accessory 89 is in operation, the received accessory operation start command is ignored, and the third accessory 89 continues to operate in the operation mode already in operation.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent a movable accessory that is operating in one operation mode from starting to operate in another operation mode due to the influence of noise or the like or an error in the program. Therefore, it is possible to continue operating the movable accessory without feeling uncomfortable for the player.

  Further, the first accessory driving flag 223c and the second accessory driving flag 223d are referred to by the operation interference determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221, respectively. Although details will be described later, the motion interference determination process is a process that is executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, and is included in the accessory operation start command. When the movable accessory indicated by the accessory type is operated, if the operation interferes with the already-movable movable accessory, the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is performed. For non-execution.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in order to make the first and second actors 87 and 88 conspicuous for the player, both movable actors 87 and 88 are enlarged. When these first and second accessories 87 and 88 are operated simultaneously, the first accessory 87 lowered from the center frame 86 and the second accessory 88 elevated from the center frame 86 collide with each other. Interfere with each other.

  Here, FIG. 10 (b) shows the relationship with the movable accessory that is operating when receiving the accessory action start command, and the action of the movable accessory that is instructed to start the action by the accessory action start command is shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed whether it was made execution or non-execution. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when an operation start of the first accessory 87 is instructed by the accessory action start command, the second accessory 88 is in operation when the accessory action start command is received. For example, when the first accessory 87 is operated, it interferes with the second accessory 88, so that the operation of the first accessory 87 is not executed. On the other hand, when an operation start of the first accessory 87 is instructed by the accessory action start command, if the third accessory 89 is in operation when the accessory action start command is received, the first accessory 87 And the third accessory 89 do not interfere with each other, the operation of the first accessory 87 is executed.

  In addition, when an operation start of the second accessory 88 is instructed by the accessory action start command, if the first accessory 87 is in operation when the accessory action start command is received, the first accessory 87 Is operated, the second combination 88 interferes with each other, so the operation of the second combination 88 is not executed. On the other hand, when an operation start of the second accessory 88 is instructed by the accessory action start command, if the third accessory 89 is in operation when the accessory action start command is received, the second accessory 88 And the third accessory 89 do not interfere with each other, the operation of the second accessory 88 is executed.

  In addition, when an operation start of the second accessory 88 is instructed by the accessory action start command, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 are in operation when the accessory action start command is received. However, they do not interfere with each other between the first combination 87 and the third combination 89, and between the second combination 88 and the third combination 89. Therefore, in this case, the operation of the second accessory 88 is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 from interfering with each other, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 may operate simultaneously. The processing in the display control device 114 is programmed so that an accessory operation start command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 so that there is no such thing.

  However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and the operation of a certain movable accessory is originally a different command. There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as an accessory operation start command for instructing the start. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, there is also a possibility that the display control device 114 may transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 a command for starting the movement of the accessory that instructs the start of the operation of the movable accessory that interferes with the already operating movable accessory. .

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device 113 is controlled by the display control device 114 in order to prevent the second accessory 88 from operating while the first accessory 87 is operating due to such a malfunction. When receiving the accessory operation start command for instructing the operation start of the accessory 88, the MPU 221 executes the operation interference determination process, whereby the first accessory 87 operates based on the value of the first accessory driving flag 223c. Determine if it is in the middle. If the first accessory 87 is in operation, the received accessory action start command for instructing the start of the operation of the second accessory 88 is ignored, and the second accessory 88 is deactivated.

  Further, in order to prevent the first accessory 87 from operating while the second accessory 88 is operating due to the above-described problem, the sound lamp control device 113 operates the first accessory 87 from the display control device 114. When receiving the accessory action start command for instructing the start, the MPU 221 executes the action interference determination process to determine whether or not the second accessory 88 is operating based on the value of the second accessory drive flag 223d. Determine whether. If the second accessory 88 is in operation, the received accessory operation start command for instructing the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 is ignored, and the first accessory 87 is deactivated.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first and second actors 87 and 88 from simultaneously operating and interfering with each other due to the influence of noise or the like or an error in the program.

  Note that, as a result of the operation interference determination process, if the movable accessory that is instructed to start the operation by the accessory operation start command is made non-operation, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 to that effect. The accessory operation non-execution command is transmitted (see S2216 in FIG. 27). The accessory action non-execution command includes the information related to the type of the movable accessory that has been inactivated and the information related to the operation mode of the movable action that has been inactivated, from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Sent to.

  The command for instructing the execution of a feature object is that the command for initiating the action of a movable accessory that has been inactivated is not an influence of noise or an error in the program, but a regular function action start command. This is to cause the display control device 114 to respond to the fact that the movable accessory has not been operated in response to the normally output accessory operation start command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11A, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the first accessory 87 is operating will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the first accessory 87 is operating.

  In the display control device 114, when the actor action start command instructing the start of the action of the first accessory 87 is output to the sound lamp controller 113, the action of the first accessory 87 is effective for the player. In order to make it stand out, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image 81a in which the periphery of the first accessory 87 lowered from the center frame 86 is illuminated.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, when the actor action start command for instructing the start of the action of the first accessory 87 is received during the operation of the second accessory 88, as described above, by the operation interference determination process, The action of the action start command for instructing the action start of the object 87 is not executed, but the second action that has been transmitted / received earlier is received by mistake due to the influence of noise or the like or an error on the program. It may be an accessory operation start command for instructing operation start of 88. That is, in this case, it is possible that the accessory operation start command for instructing the operation start of the first accessory 87 is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113. .

  However, when the action action start command for instructing the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 is ignored by the operation interference process of the sound lamp control device 113 and the first accessory 87 is deactivated, the first accessory If the accessory operation start command for instructing the operation start of the object 87 is a regular command, the periphery of the first accessory 87 that should have been lowered is illuminated even though the first accessory 87 does not descend. Only the image 81 a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, there is a possibility that a meaningless image will be shown to a player who is playing a game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81, and the interest in the game will be lost.

  On the other hand, when the display control device 113 receives the accessory action non-execution command, the display of the movable action that is actually not executed according to the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action non-execution command and the operation mode. An image that operates in an operation mode in which an object is not executed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to cover the image that is originally displayed. An example of this is shown in FIG. FIG. 11B shows the third example when the accessory action non-execution command indicating that the first accessory 87 is not executed is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11B, when an accessory action non-execution command indicating that the first accessory 87 is not executed is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays the image 81b in which the first accessory 87 indicated by the accessory action non-execution command operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action non-execution command of the first accessory 87. The image is displayed so as to cover the image 81a illuminated in the periphery. Thus, even if the first accessory 87 is not actually operated, the first accessory 87 is lowered from the center frame 86 to the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to show a rotating image while illuminating the periphery. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 10A, the description will be continued. The operating accessory number counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of movable accessories that are operating among the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89. The action object number counter 223f is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

  Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 has received the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the movable combination indicated by the accessory operation start command in the operation mode indicated by the received accessory operation start command. When an action of an object is started, 1 is added to the action object number counter 223f (see S2214 in FIG. 27). Further, any one of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 in which the solenoid and the motor are driven based on the accessory drive control data becomes the drive end timing of the solenoid and the motor by the accessory drive control data, When the operation of the movable accessory is completed, 1 is subtracted from the accessory operation number counter 223f (see S2305, S2310, and S2315 in FIG. 30).

  The action accessory number counter 223f is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a feature action start command from the display control device 114, and the number of movable actors operating at that time is confirmed (FIG. 27). S2209). Then, only when the movable accessory that is operating at that time is less than 2, the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the received accessory operation start command is the operation indicated by the accessory operation start command. In accordance with an aspect, operation begins. On the other hand, if the number of movable actors operating at the time of receiving the accessory action start command is two or more, the accessory action start command is ignored and the movable accessory indicated by the action accessory start command is not displayed. Let it be an action.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are simultaneously operated exceeding a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the first accessory 87 Solenoids and motors such as a 1-actuator vertical movement solenoid 87a and a first-actuator rotation motor 87b, a second-actuator vertical movement solenoid 88a of a second-reaction 88, and a third-actor rotation motor 89a of a third-reaction Many of them must be operated at the same time, and there is a risk that the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be insufficient, causing problems in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  In particular, a main control device 110 that performs important control of the game such as a big win lottery, a payout control device 111 that controls the payout of award balls and rental balls to a player, a payout motor 216 for paying out balls, and various winning openings If the operation of the switch that detects the ball entering the ball, the switch that detects the ball to be paid out, etc. becomes unstable, the jackpot is not correctly given to the player or the ball to be paid out is not paid out. The player may be disadvantaged.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, a command operation start command is sent from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the first game 87, the second game 88, and the third game 89 do not operate simultaneously. The processing in the display control device 114 is programmed so as to be transmitted to the user.

  However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and the operation of a certain movable accessory is originally a different command. There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as an accessory operation start command for instructing the start. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, the display control device 114 gives a command for starting the operation of another movable accessory to the voice lamp control device 113 even though the two movable combinations are already operating. There is also a risk of transmission.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, in order to suppress the operation of all of the first combination 87, the second combination 88, and the third combination 89, the movable number being operated by the operation combination counter 223f is operated. Only when the value of the action accessory counter 223f is less than 2, the operation of the movable accessory is started in accordance with the received accessory action start command. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of all of the first combination 87, the second combination 88, and the third combination 89, and the movement of all these movable combinations causes a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented from occurring in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, since the value of the operation accessory number counter 223f is 2 or more, when the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the accessory operation start command is made non-operation, as a result of the operation interference determination process, In the same manner as when the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the object operation start command is made non-operation, the sound lamp control device 113 sends the accessory operation non-execution command to notify the display control device 114 to that effect. Transmit (see S2216 in FIG. 27).

  For example, in the sound lamp control device 113, a character operation start command for instructing the operation start of the first character 87 when the second character 88 and the third character 89 and the two movable characters are operating is issued. When received, as described above, the action of the action starting command for instructing the start of the action of the first action 87 is not executed. However, the action was received erroneously due to the influence of noise or the like or an error in the program. May be a character operation start command for instructing the start of operation of the second accessory 88 transmitted / received earlier or a character operation start command for instructing the start of operation of the third accessory 89. That is, in this case, it is possible that the accessory operation start command for instructing the operation start of the first accessory 87 is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113. .

  As described above, in the display control device 114, when the actor operation start command for instructing the operation start of the first accessory 87 is output to the sound lamp control device 113, the player performs the operation of the first accessory 87. In order to make it stand out effectively, an image 81a in which the periphery of the first accessory 87 lowered from the center frame 86 is illuminated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 11A). However, when the voice action controller 113 ignores the accessory action start command for instructing the start of the action of the first accessory 87 and the first accessory 87 is deactivated, the first accessory 87 does not descend. Nevertheless, only the image 81a shining around the first accessory 87 that should be lowered is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, there is a possibility that a meaningless image will be shown to a player who is playing a game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81, and the interest in the game will be lost.

  On the other hand, when the display control device 113 receives the accessory action non-execution command, the display of the movable action that is actually not executed according to the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action non-execution command and the operation mode. An image that operates in an operation mode in which an object is not executed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to cover the image that is originally displayed. For example, in the above-described example, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a command for not executing the accessory action indicating that the first accessory 87 is not executed to the display control device 114. 114, the first actor 87 indicated by the accessory action non-execution command causes the image 81b that operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action non-execution command to shine around the first accessory 87. The image 81a is displayed over the image 81a (FIG. 11B). Thus, even if the first accessory 87 is not actually operated, the first accessory 87 is lowered from the center frame 86 to the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the rotating image can be shown while illuminating the periphery, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the game.

  The operation interference flag 223g is set between the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 when the voice lamp controller 113 operates the movable accessory according to the accessory operation start command received from the display controller 114. This flag indicates that they interfere with each other. The operation interference flag 223g indicates that the first and second objects 87 and 88 do not interfere with each other in the case of delivery. On the other hand, the operation interference flag 223g indicates that the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 interfere with each other when turned on.

  The operation interference flag 223g is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the operation interference determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the second accessory is in operation (second If the operation of the first accessory is instructed (when the accessory driving flag 223d is ON), the operation interference flag 223g is set to ON (S2255), and the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 are Shows that they interfere with each other. In addition, in the motion interference determination process (see FIG. 29), if the operation of the second accessory is instructed while the first accessory is operating (when the first accessory driving flag 223c is on), the operation is performed. The interference flag 223g is set to ON (S2255), and indicates that the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 interfere with each other.

  When the operation interference flag 223g is set to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 ignores the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, and the movable combination instructed to start the operation by the accessory operation start command. Processing to make the object non-operation is performed (see S2211: Yes in FIG. 27). Thereby, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 and the 2nd accessory 88 operate | move simultaneously by the influence of noise etc., the error on a program, etc., and mutually interfere.

  Thereafter, the operation interference flag 223g is set to OFF, and the above-described accessory operation non-execution command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the operated flag 223h indicates that the movable accessory that is instructed to start the operation by the received accessory operation start command is already in operation. It is a flag indicating that it is in the middle. The operation completed flag 223h indicates that the movable combination instructed to start the operation by the received accessory operation start command is already in operation when it is on, and when it is off, the received accessory operation starts. This indicates that the movable accessory whose operation is instructed by the command is not operating.

  The operated flag 223h is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, in the operation completion determination process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, the operation is started by the received accessory operation start command. When it is determined that the movable accessory instructed is already operating, the operated flag 223h is set to ON.

  When the operated flag 223h is set to ON, the voice lamp control device 113 ignores the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114 (S2207: Yes in FIG. 27). Thereby, the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the accessory operation start command can be continuously operated in the operation mode already in operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a movable accessory that is operating in one operation mode from starting to operate in another operation mode due to the influence of noise, etc., or a program error. It is possible to continue operating the character. Thereafter, the operated flag 223h is set to OFF.

  The RAM 223 also stores a command received from the main control device 110, a main control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and commands received by the display control device 114. A display control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a change start flag (not shown) indicating that a change effect should be started in the ON state, and the like Have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area. The command is analyzed by the determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  When the display command determination process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the first stored display command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the display control command storage area. Then, the display command determination process analyzes the command and performs a process according to the command.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 26).

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display type command for notifying the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display type command, thereby performing the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226. Can be combined.

  Further, the display control device 114 determines whether to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89 according to the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. To do. Then, in the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, it is determined to be used in the notice effect. The display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of this as an accessory operation start command, including the operation mode of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89. The The voice lamp control device 113 uses a solenoid or a motor provided in each movable accessory so that the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command is operated in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. To drive. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid 209, a first action vertical movement solenoid 87a, and a second action vertical movement. Solenoid 88a and other solenoids, motor 1b rotating motor 87b, motor 3a rotating third motor 89a, etc., 12 volt voltage, logic 5 volt voltage, RAM backup backup A voltage or the like is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113, and the display type command for notifying the display content to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An accessory operation start command for instructing operation start of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in an effect corresponding to the display data table is stored. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, reads out the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read-out data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an outlier symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 4R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect includes the one that displays the out symbol as a stop symbol, the one that displays the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), and the normal jackpot (15R normal) Each of them is provided with a decisive display.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “town stage”, “sea stage”, “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or the information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back surface type and the back surface type corresponding to which state You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “2”. 2 "is attached.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuation, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a girl character image, the display content is defined as “girl character display”, and a light-emitting effect image is displayed. When it is to be displayed, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  When the establishment of the probability variation reach is displayed, the display content defines “establishment of the probability variation reach” together with the type of the main symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. When displaying the establishment of the normal reach, “normal reach establishment” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that established the normal reach. In addition, when displaying double reach, both probability variation reach and normal reach are established, so the display content first defines “establishment of probability variation reach” together with the type of main symbol that established probability variation reach. In addition, “normal reach establishment” is defined together with the type of main symbol for which normal reach is established.

  The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents, “actual object driving” information indicating the operation start of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 is defined at some addresses. The 1st accessory 87-the 3rd accessory 89 are driven according to the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, and a display data table is a 3rd symbol display by the display data table. In accordance with the image displayed on the device 81, the “actual object driving” information is defined so that any one of the first to third objects 87 to 89 is driven.

  The “actual accessory driving” information is configured by the type of movable accessory (movable accessory type) for starting the operation and the operation mode indicating the operation content of the movable accessory. As the movable accessory type, one of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 is defined. In addition, as for the operation mode, one of the plurality of operation modes set in advance for each of the movable accessories 87 to 89 is defined.

  The display control device 114 generates an accessory action start command including information related to the movable accessory type to be started from the operation and information related to the operation mode based on the “actual accessory driving” information, and the sound lamp control device It transmits to 113.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (to be described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, in the case where the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation including information related to the movable accessory type to start operation from now on and information related to the operation mode according to the accessory driving information. A start command is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. The additional data table storage area 232b adds the display contents of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110, and additional data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and changing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. Is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  In the present embodiment, the display is performed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. A case will be described in which the display content for displaying an image simulating the first accessory 87 or the second accessory 88 is defined by the additional data table.

  That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are operated by the accessory operation start command from the display controller 114. When the second accessory 88 is operated at the same time, they collide with each other and interfere with each other. Therefore, even when the first accessory 87 is in operation, even if the accessory operation start command for instructing the operation start of the second accessory is received. The operation of the second accessory 88 is not executed. In addition, even when the second action 88 is in operation, the first action 87 is not executed even if a command for starting the action of the first action 87 is received. In addition, if the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are simultaneously operated in excess of a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the supply of power is insufficient, and the pachinko machine 10 Since the movement may become unstable and cause a disadvantage to the player, when two movable actors are operating, if a new command for starting the actor action is received, The operation is not executed.

  Here, in the display control device 114, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 operate simultaneously, or the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 all operate simultaneously. In order to avoid this, the accessory driving information is defined in the display data table. However, a part of the command is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like, the first action 87 and the second action 88 operate simultaneously due to a program error, or the like, or the first action 87 and the second action It is possible that the object 88 and the third accessory 89 all operate simultaneously. Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is performed according to the operation state of the movable accessory. Not executed.

  However, it is not the actor action start command that instructs the start of the movement of the movable accessory that has been unexecuted this time, but the role that has been transmitted / received earlier is not received due to the influence of noise, etc. It can also be an object operation start command. In other words, it is sufficient that the accessory action start command for instructing the start of the action of the movable accessory not executed this time is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113. obtain. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image for conspicuous of the movable accessory that has been instructed to start the operation normally. However, since the movable accessory that should normally operate does not operate, only an image for making the movable accessory stand out is displayed, and a meaningless image is shown to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is not executed, information on the type of the movable accessory and the movable accessory Is transmitted to the display control device 114, including the information on the operation mode that should have been executed. When the display control device 114 receives the character action non-execution command, the display control device 114 displays an image (display data table) that is originally displayed as an image that operates in an operation mode in which the non-executable movable accessory is non-executed. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The additional data table covers the image displayed in accordance with the display data table on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the image that operates in the operation mode in which the movable accessory that is actually not executed is made non-executed. The drawing contents necessary for display are defined, and an additional data table is prepared for each operation mode prepared for each movable combination.

  In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, a sprite type (character type: character type: No. 1 character, second character, etc.), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 14).

  In the present embodiment, the display is performed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. Although the case where the display content for displaying the image imitating the first accessory 87 or the second accessory 88 is defined by the additional data table has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 The display data for displaying the notice effect image displayed in addition to the change effect displayed by the change display data table selected based on (display change pattern command) is defined by the additional data table. May be.

  Further, in the additional data table, as in the display data table, in addition to the above-described drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on may be defined at some addresses. For example, when a notice effect using “fish school” is additionally displayed, “fish school” may be defined as the display content.

  Further, in the additional data table, in addition to the drawing contents, the “actual object driving” information indicating the operation start of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 is defined at some addresses in addition to the drawing contents. May be. The first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 are driven in accordance with the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the additional data table is displayed in the third symbol display by the additional data table. In accordance with the image displayed on the device 81, the “actual object driving” information may be defined so that any one of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 is driven.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (“00FDH in the example of FIG. 14). “)” Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the accessory action non-execution command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 generates an additional data table corresponding to the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action non-execution command and the operation mode from the additional data table storage area 232b. The data is read and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 14, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to the effect image (for example, the variation effect image), when another effect image (for example, an image imitating the first accessory) is displayed, the addition corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed is added. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a time counter 233e.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation includes information relating to the movable accessory type to be started to operate and information relating to the operation mode according to the accessory driving information. A start command is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  The additional data table buffer 233b produces an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command / execution command from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (an image imitating the first accessory, the second accessory, etc.) to be additionally displayed. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. When there is an effect to be determined and added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 15) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents are to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer Update processing is executed (see S1709 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S1781 in FIG. 40).

  The MPU 231 updates the address indicated by the pointer 233c each time the pointer 233c is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in (1).

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 15, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 32B). ))), The time counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S1404, see FIG. 37) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 22. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port. 64 and a start winning process associated with winning in the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 17, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1108), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When there is a winning, a holding process of values indicated by various random number counters and a counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a win at the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 is provided. If the number of reserved balls NA <4 is not satisfied (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA <4 of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 (S1202: Yes). 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of held balls NA) (S1203), and further, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205). Transition to processing. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying winning in the first entrance 64 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  In the subsequent process of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). Then, there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 If the number of held balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and the number of reserved balls NB <4 of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1207: Yes). The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203 (the number of held balls NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and further, a first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 updated by the processing of S1208 is set (S1210). End the process and return to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the winning in the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1302: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

  In this data shift process, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the fluctuation start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of held balls NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the number of held balls NB is 0, and the start winning to the second entrance 640 is made. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating variation effect associated with (S1304: No), then the value of the special figure 1 retention ball number counter 203d (the retention ball of the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not (number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the held ball number NA is 0, and the hold associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no changed presentation effect (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. (S1317). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1317: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S1318), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1317: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the processing of S1318 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701 in FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of held balls NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (hold) The number of balls NA) is decremented by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 holding first area of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 1st Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 2nd Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 4th Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S1312), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  In this variation process, when it becomes possible to start the variation effect (S1303: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is held (S1304: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding ball number counter 203d, that is, whether or not the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning prize at the second entrance 640 is configured so that the big win lottery is performed in preference to the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big win lottery. Yes.

  In the processing of S1302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has passed (S1313). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1313: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S1314), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1315). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the process of S1308 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds) or the 4R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of four rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue color are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In this case, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1316), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the change start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This variation start process (S1308) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A lottery of “big hit” or “off” (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (that is, normal and short time), “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. "Is a jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (ie, probabilistic change)," 28, 58, 85 "associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836 , 866, 892 "is the jackpot random value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value. Determine.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1401 that it is a big hit (S1401: Yes), in order to set the display mode at the time of the big win, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402). ). Then, when the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402: Yes), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the second entrance 640. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) for "second entrance" is set (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is off (S1402: No), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is set (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. The display mode for the corresponding jackpot is set (S1405).

  In other words, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot Based on whether the maximum round number is a 4R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 4 rounds, or a 15R normal jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a big round of 15 rounds The display mode of the display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set.

  Also, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type Set as

  Here, when the jackpot is won with winning the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is ¼ according to the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with probability (= 25/100), 15R normal jackpot probability with 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with probability of 1/2 (= 50/100).

  On the other hand, in the case where a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is ½ according to the jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 50/100), 15R normal jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100).

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1406). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether normal, short-running, or probability variation), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C). Based on. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the game is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the processing of S1407, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-clock symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1408). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, short-running, or probability variation), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern for detachment. This is performed based on the table 202d (the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1408, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1406 or the process of S1408 is completed, the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1406 or S1408 is changed to the special figure 1 (various effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( A variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set including special figure type information indicating whether or not the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). The

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, it is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1551), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, by this external output process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed in the special pattern in the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the special game state at the time of the big hit, which are necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. In this case, a command necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the special winning opening 65a is obtained when the special game state is a big hit. In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition), a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, a normal symbol control process for controlling the display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol, for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. Display is implemented. Immediately before the second symbol display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the acquired value of the second random number counter C4. Based on the result of the lottery, As a result of the change display of the two symbols, the symbol “◯” or “×” is stopped and displayed. When the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed and the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, when the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is removed, the electric accessory 640a is kept closed.

  In addition, in the lottery of the second symbol, different numbers are set as the random number values to be won depending on whether the gaming state is normal, short in time, or in probability change. In other words, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the game state is normal and is a win. On the other hand, there are 250 random number values that can be won when the game state is shorter or more likely, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is winning when the gaming state is short-running or probable.

  In addition, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal. Furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is released for a longer time when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also set shorter during normal change and during shorter time than during normal. Thereby, during probability change and time reduction, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a ball can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery when the electric accessory 640a is opened is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, since the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and easily enters the second entrance 640, the through gate 67 and the second entrance The ball is fired toward the ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the 15R probability variable big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim for.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 20 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1920 (see FIG. 24) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 24), it executes the power-off process in S1920. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1920 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1920. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process at S1820, the sound lamp control is performed. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Transition to processing. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1920 is executed (see S1919 in FIG. 24). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1920 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the main process is started, or whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1901 was executed last time. (S1901) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes in S1902 to S1912.

  In S1901, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S1902 to S912 in relation to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913, the main command determination process of S1915, and the display command determination process of S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the display command determination process of S1916 at a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the display control device 114. Further, by executing the fluctuation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1902). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, various solenoids and various motors provided in the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 are driven according to the accessory drive control data, and the first accessory 87 to the third An accessory driving process for operating the accessory 89 is executed (S1908). Details of this accessory driving process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, lamp editing processing is executed (S1909), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the sound data is decoded according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decoded sound is output from the sound output device 226. . When an alarm sound output is set, an alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226 by this sound editing / output process.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1911, a counter update process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated.

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, a variable display process, which is a process for setting these generated commands to be transmitted to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display process, a main command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1915). Details of the main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination process, a display command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed (S1916). Details of the display command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1916 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1920). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to the process of S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1918: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process (S1915). This main command determination processing (S1915) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Then, processing corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the main command determination process will be described below.

  In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S2000). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2000: Yes), the variation pattern type of the variation effect to be started from the variation pattern command (normal reach various types, super reach various types, special reach various types, short deviation, long (Ex.) Is extracted (S2001), and it is further shown whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

  The variation pattern type and special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used when setting a variation pattern command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later. . Further, the special figure type information is obtained when the value of either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 in accordance with the start of the variable effect in the fluctuation display process. To be referenced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2000: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command (15R probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit, 15R The normal jackpot, complete miss, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  By setting the variation start flag to ON, the start of the variation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to start the variation effect. The stop type is a display stop for notifying the stop symbol in order to determine the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started and to display the stop symbol with the determined stop symbol in the later-described variation display process (see FIG. 26). Used when setting a type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). If it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held in the main controller 110, is extracted, and this is stored in the special figure 1 held ball counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2009). ). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640, which is reserved in the main controller 110, is extracted and is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223 b of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2010).

  Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2011), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2009: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2012). If no other command has been received (S2012: No), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2012: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2013), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the fluctuation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1913). This variation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. Therefore, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and the generated display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to be transmitted to the control device 114.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main controller 110. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then the variation pattern command in the process of S2102 of the main command determination process (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern type (various reach, super-reach, special reach, short out, long out) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2105. And obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the extracted variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated and set for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the extracted stop symbol to the display control device 114 is generated, and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol. At this time, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, based on the stop type indicated by the display stop type command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command. The stop symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  Here, the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 defines only the variation time, but the display control device 114 provides various detailed variations prepared for the variation time. One variation pattern is selected from the patterns, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop types notified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 indicate rough stop types such as 15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, complete loss, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach. The display control device 114 determines a stop symbol that matches the stop type.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 manages the reserved ball as it is consumed (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball is set). In order to reduce the number of held balls, first, from the special figure type information extracted in the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, that is, special figure 1. (S2107), if it is a fluctuation according to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserve ball number command for setting is set (S2109), the fluctuation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the variation effect to start this time is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, that is, the variation according to the special drawing 2 (S2107: No). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b (S2110). Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2111), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  Next, a display command determination process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the display command determination process (S1916). In the display command determination process (S1916), as described above, the command received from the display control device 114 is determined, and the process corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the display command determination process will be described below.

  In the display command determination process, first, from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the display control device 114 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the display type command is received from the display control device 110. Is determined (S2201). If it is determined that the display type command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S2202). Then, a setting for reading out the audio data corresponding to the display content from the ROM 222 is performed, the reproduction of the audio is started (S2203), and the display command determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is then determined whether or not an accessory operation start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2204). ). If it is determined that the accessory action start command has been received (S2204: Yes), the type of the movable accessory to be operated and the action mode indicated by the accessory action start command are extracted (S2205). An operation completion determination process is executed to determine whether or not the movable accessory whose operation start is instructed by the accessory operation start command is already operating (S2206).

  Here, the details of the operation completion determination process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the operation completion determination process (S2206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the operation completion determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory operation start command is the first accessory 87 (S2231), and if it is the first accessory 87 (S2231: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the first accessory driving flag 223c is on (S2232). As a result, if the first accessory driving flag 223c is off (S2232: No), the first accessory 87 is not operating, so the operation completion determination process is terminated, and the first accessory driving flag 223c is set. If it is on (S2232: Yes), since the first accessory 87 is already in operation, the operated flag 223h is turned on (S2236), and the operated determination process ends.

  As a result of the processing in S2231, when it is determined that the accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory operation start command is not the first accessory 87 (S2231: No), the operation is performed by receiving the accessory operation start command. It is determined whether or not the feature type to be performed is the second feature 88 (S2233). If the accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory action start command is the second accessory 88 (S2233: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the second accessory drive flag 223d is on (S2234). ). As a result, if the second accessory driving flag 223d is off (S2234: No), the operation completion determination process is terminated, and if the second accessory driving flag 223d is on (S2234: Yes), the second Since the accessory 87 is already operating, the operating flag 223h is turned on (S2236), and the operating determination process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2233, when it is determined that the movable accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory action start command is not the second accessory 88 (S2233: No), the action is started by receiving the accessory action start command. The movable combination type is the third combination 89. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the third accessory driving flag 223e is on (S2235). As a result, if the third accessory driving flag 223e is off (S2235: No), the operation completion determination process is terminated, and if the third accessory driving flag 223e is on (S2235: Yes), the third Since the accessory 89 is already operating, the operating flag 223h is turned on (S2236), and the operating determination process is terminated.

  As described above, in the operation completion determination process (S2206), it is determined whether or not the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the received accessory operation start command is already operating. In addition, the operated flag 223h is set to ON.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description of the display command determination process (S1916) will be continued. When the operation completion determination process (S2206) is executed, it is then determined whether or not the operation completion flag 223h is on (S2207). If the operation completion flag 223h is on (S2207: Yes), the operation completion flag is determined. 223h is set to OFF (S2208), and the display command determination process is terminated as it is.

  In other words, the operated flag 223h is set to ON based on the fact that the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the accessory operation start command received in the processing of S2204 is already operating by the operated determination process (S2206). If received, the received command to start acting is ignored. As a result, the movable accessory whose operation start is instructed by the received accessory operation start command is not already started in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command, but is already operating. The operation mode can be continuously operated.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the processing in the display control device 114 is programmed so that the movable action that has already been operated is not newly instructed by the action start command. Yes. However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and although it was originally another command, There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as a command for starting the operation of the accessory. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, there is also a possibility that the display control device 114 may transmit the accessory action start command to the voice lamp control device 113 again for the movable accessory that is already operating.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device 113 performs display control in order to prevent a movable accessory that is operating in one operation mode from starting operation in another operation mode due to such a problem. When receiving the accessory operation start command from the device 114, the MPU 221 executes the operation completion determination process, and the movable accessory whose operation is started by the received accessory operation start command is an already operating movable accessory. In this case, the operated flag 223h is set to ON. Then, when the operated flag 223h is set to ON, the received accessory action start command is ignored, and based on the accessory driving control data already set before receiving the accessory action start command, Subsequently, the movable accessory is operated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a movable accessory that is operating in one operation mode from starting to operate in another operation mode due to the influence of noise or the like or an error in the program. Therefore, it is possible to continue operating the movable accessory without feeling uncomfortable for the player.

  As a result of the process of S2207, when the operated flag 223h is OFF (S2207: No), it is then determined whether or not the operating accessory number counter 223f is less than 2 (S2209). Then, when the number of operating accessory counter 223f is 2 or more (S2209: No), since 2 or more movable actors are already operating, the received operating agent start command is ignored and the operating accessory start command is ignored. The movable accessory indicated by is set as non-operation, and the process proceeds to S2216.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are simultaneously operated exceeding a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the first accessory 87 Solenoids and motors such as a 1-actuator vertical movement solenoid 87a and a first-actuator rotation motor 87b, a second-actuator vertical movement solenoid 88a of a second-reaction 88, and a third-actor rotation motor 89a of a third-reaction Many of them must be operated at the same time, and there is a risk that the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be insufficient, causing problems in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  In particular, a main control device 110 that performs important control of the game such as a big win lottery, a payout control device 111 that controls the payout of award balls and rental balls to a player, a payout motor 216 for paying out balls, and various winning openings If the operation of the switch that detects the ball entering the ball, the switch that detects the ball to be paid out, etc. becomes unstable, the jackpot is not correctly given to the player or the ball to be paid out is not paid out. The player may be disadvantaged.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a command operation start command is sent from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device so that the first game 87, the second game 88, and the third game 89 do not operate simultaneously. The processing in the display control device 114 is programmed to be transmitted to 113.

  However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and the operation of a certain movable accessory is originally a different command. There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as an accessory operation start command for instructing the start. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, the display control device 114 gives a command for starting the operation of another movable accessory to the voice lamp control device 113 even though the two movable combinations are already operating. There is also a risk of transmission.

  Therefore, in the display command determination process, in order to suppress the operation of all of the first combination 87, the second combination 88, and the third combination 89, the movable combination being operated by the operation combination counter 223f. The number of objects is counted, and only when the value of the operation object number counter 223f is less than 2, the operation of the movable object is started according to the received object operation start command. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of all of the first combination 87, the second combination 88, and the third combination 89, and the movement of all these movable combinations causes a disadvantage to the player. Can be prevented from occurring in the pachinko machine 10.

  As a result of the process of S2209, when the operation accessory number counter 223f is less than 2 (S2209: Yes), an operation interference determination process is then executed (S2210). This operation interference determination process determines whether or not the already operating movable accessory interferes with the operation when the movable accessory indicated by the accessory type included in the accessory operation start command is operated. It is a process to do.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in order to make the first and second actors 87 and 88 conspicuous for the player, both movable actors 87 and 88 are enlarged. When these first and second accessories 87 and 88 are operated simultaneously, the first accessory 87 lowered from the center frame 86 and the second accessory 88 elevated from the center frame 86 collide with each other. Interfere with each other.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 from interfering with each other, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 do not operate simultaneously. Thus, the processing in the display control device 114 is programmed so that the accessory operation start command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  However, due to the influence of noise or the like, a part of the command received from the display control device 114 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed, and the operation of a certain movable accessory is originally a different command. There is a possibility that the command may be interpreted as an accessory operation start command for instructing the start. In recent years, various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have become complicated, and the program to be executed by the display control device 114 has also become complicated. There may be a case where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with the remaining left. In this case, there is also a possibility that the display control device 114 may transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 a command for starting the movement of the accessory that instructs the start of the operation of the movable accessory that interferes with the already operating movable accessory. .

  Therefore, in the display command determination process, in order to prevent the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 from interfering with each other due to such a problem, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 operate simultaneously. The operation interference determination process (S2210) is executed so as not to occur.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the motion interference determination process (S2210) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the operation interference determination process (S2210) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this operation interference determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory action start command is the first accessory 87 (S2251). If it is the first accessory 87 (S2251: Yes), it is determined whether or not the second accessory driving flag 223d is on (S2252). As a result, if the second accessory driving flag 223d is off (S2252: No), the second accessory 88 is not operating, and the first accessory 87 may interfere with the second accessory 88. Therefore, the operation interference determination process is terminated as it is. If the second accessory driving flag 223d is on (S2252: Yes), if the first accessory 87 is operated, it will interfere with the already operating second accessory 88. In order to deactivate the first accessory 87, the operation interference flag 223g is set to ON (S2255), and the operation interference determination process is terminated.

  As a result of the process of S2251, when it is determined that the movable accessory type to be operated by receiving the accessory action start command is not the first accessory 87 (S2251: No), then the movable accessory type to be operated is the first It is determined whether or not it is the second combination 88 (S2253). As a result, if it is the second accessory 88 (S2253: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first accessory drive flag 223c is on (S2254). As a result, if the first accessory driving flag 223c is off (S2254: No), the first accessory 87 is not operating and the second accessory 88 may interfere with the first accessory 87. Therefore, the operation interference determination process is terminated as it is. If the first accessory driving flag 223c is on (S2254: Yes), if the second accessory 88 is operated, it will interfere with the already operating first accessory 87. In order to deactivate the second accessory 88, the operation interference flag 223g is set to ON (S2255), and the operation interference determination process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2253, when it is determined that the movable accessory type to be operated by reception of the accessory action start command is not the second accessory 88 (S2253: No), the movable object whose operation is started by the accessory action start command is determined. The accessory type is a third accessory 89. Since the third accessory 89 does not interfere with the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88, in order to start the operation of the third accessory according to the accessory operation start command, the operation interference determination process is performed as it is. finish.

  As described above, in the operation interference determination process (S2210), when the movable accessory instructed to start the operation by the received accessory operation start command collides with the already-operating movable accessory and interferes, The operation interference flag 223g is set to ON.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description of the display command determination process (S1916) will be continued. When the operation interference determination process (S2210) is executed, it is then determined whether the operation interference flag 223f is on (S2211). If the operation interference flag 223f is on (S2211: Yes), the received combination The operation start command is ignored, the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is made non-operation, the operation interference flag 223f is set to OFF (S2215), and the process proceeds to S2216. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the first and second actors 87 and 88 from simultaneously operating and interfering with each other due to the influence of noise or the like or a program error.

  In the process of S2216, when the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command received by the process of S2204 is made non-operation based on the result of the process of S2209 or the result of the process of S2210 or S2211. In order to generate an accessory action non-execution command indicating the type of the movable accessory that has been inactivated and its operation mode, and to transmit the generated accessory action non-execution command to the display control device 114 The setting is made (S2216), and the display command determination process is terminated. The accessory operation non-execution command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Here, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a command for starting the operation of the second accessory 88 is received during the operation of the first accessory 87 or during the operation of the second accessory 88. When a command for starting the operation of the first accessory 87 is received, or when a command for starting the operation of a new accessory is received when two or more movable actors are operating, The operation of the movable accessory indicated by the received accessory operation start command is not executed. However, it is possible that the command received in advance for transmission of an accessory has been received erroneously due to the influence of noise or the like or an error in the program. In other words, in this case, it is possible that the accessory operation start command transmitted / received later is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the display control device 114 outputs a character operation start command for instructing the operation start of a certain movable accessory to the sound lamp control device 113, the operation of the movable accessory is effectively conspicuous to the player. In order to make it possible, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image 81 shining around the movable accessory (see FIG. 11A). However, when the accessory action start command transmitted from the display controller 114 is ignored by the processing of the sound lamp controller 113 and the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command is deactivated, the movable action If the accessory action start command for instructing the action start of the accessory is a regular command, the third symbol display device 81 only displays an image of the periphery of the movable accessory even though the movable accessory does not operate. Will be displayed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a meaningless image will be shown to a player who is playing a game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81, and the interest in the game will be lost.

  On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the accessory action non-execution command to the display control device 114, the display control device 113 operates with the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action non-execution command. In accordance with the mode, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display an image that operates in an operation mode in which the movable accessory that is actually not executed is set to the non-executed mode, over the originally displayed image. For example, when an accessory operation non-execution command indicating that the first accessory 87 is not executed is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 is notified of the role. An image 81b in which the first action 87 indicated by the object action non-execution command operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action non-execution command is placed on the image 81a illuminated around the first action 87. It is displayed in the form (FIG. 11B). Thus, even if the first accessory 87 is not actually operated, the first accessory 87 is lowered from the center frame 86 to the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the rotating image can be shown while illuminating the periphery, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the game.

  If the operation interference flag 223f is turned off as a result of the processing of S2211 (S2211: No), the movable accessory whose operation is instructed by the accessory operation start command received by the processing of S2204 is already in operation. It does not collide with an object and interfere with each other. Therefore, the accessory drive control data corresponding to the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command of the movable accessory instructed to start the action by the accessory action start command received in S2204 is read from the ROM 222. Then, it is set so as to drive a solenoid or a motor provided in the movable accessory according to the accessory driving control data (S2212). Then, an accessory driving flag (any one of the first accessory driving flag 223c to the third accessory driving flag 223e) corresponding to the movable accessory type to be operated is set to ON (S2213), and the operating accessory counter 223f is set. Is incremented by 1 (S2214), and the display command determination process is terminated.

  As a result of the process of S2204, when it is determined that the accessory operation start command has not been received (S2204: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2216). . If no other command has been received (S2216: No), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2216: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2217), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the details of the accessory driving process (S1908) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the accessory driving process (S1908). In this accessory driving process, as described above, various solenoids and various motors provided in the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 are driven according to the accessory driving control data, and the first accessory 87 to the third This is a process for operating the accessory 89, and is executed every second in the main process.

  In this accessory driving process, first, it is determined whether or not the first accessory driving flag 223c is ON (S2301). If the first accessory driving flag 223c is ON (S2301: Yes), the first accessory is determined. Since 87 is in operation, a first action vertical movement solenoid that moves the first action 87 in the front view downward direction of the game area according to the action drive control data set for the first action 87. 87a is driven (S2302). Next, based on the accessory driving control data, it is determined whether or not it is the driving end timing of the first accessory 87 (S2303). If it is the driving end timing of the first accessory 87 (S2303: Yes), the first The accessory driving flag 223c is set to OFF (S2304), the action accessory counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

  As a result of the process of S2303, if the driving end timing of the first accessory 87 is not reached (S2303: No), the processes of S2304 and S2305 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2306. Further, as a result of the processing of S2301, if the first accessory driving flag 223c is OFF, the processing of S2302 to S2305 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not the second accessory driving flag 223d is on (S2306). If the second accessory driving flag 223d is on (S2306: Yes), the second accessory 88 is operating. Therefore, in accordance with the accessory driving control data set for the second accessory 88, the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a that moves the second accessory 88 in the front view direction of the game area is driven. (S2307). Next, based on the accessory driving control data, it is determined whether or not it is the driving end timing of the second accessory 88 (S2308), and if it is the driving end timing of the second accessory 88 (S2308: Yes), the second The accessory driving flag 223d is set to OFF (S2309), the action accessory counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S2310), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  As a result of the process of S2308, if it is not the driving end timing of the second accessory 88 (S2308: No), the processes of S2309 and S2310 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2311. As a result of the process of S2306, if the second accessory drive flag 223d is off, the processes of S2307 to S2310 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2311.

  In the processing of S2311, it is determined whether or not the third accessory driving flag 223e is on (S2311). If the third accessory driving flag 223e is on (S2311: Yes), the third accessory 89 is operating. Therefore, the third accessory rotating motor 89a for rotating the third accessory 89 is driven in accordance with the accessory driving control data set for the third accessory 89 (S2312). Next, based on the accessory driving control data, it is determined whether or not it is the driving end timing of the third accessory 89 (S2313). If it is the driving end timing of the third accessory 89 (S2313: Yes), the third The accessory driving flag 223e is set to OFF (S2314), the action accessory counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S2315), and the process proceeds to S2316.

  As a result of the process of S2313, if the driving end timing of the third accessory 89 is not reached (S2313: No), the processes of S2314 and S2315 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2316. If the third accessory driving flag 223e is turned off as a result of the processing of S2311, the processing of S2312 to S2315 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2316.

  In the process of S2316, it is determined whether or not the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is being driven by the process of S2302 (S2316). If the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is being driven (S2316: Yes), the first accessory rotation motor 87b is also driven to rotate accordingly (S2317), and this accessory driving process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the first accessory upper and lower solenoids 87a are not being driven (S2317: No), the processing of S2317 is skipped and the accessory driving process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the first hand 87 in the pachinko machine 10 rotates while the first hand 87 is lowered and visible to the player. In the conventional pachinko machine, in such a case, as the accessory driving control data for operating the first accessory 87, the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the driving of the first accessory rotating motor 87b are performed. Both the pattern and the pattern are defined and stored in the ROM 222. Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, the designer designs both the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the drive pattern of the first accessory rotation motor 87b. This had to be a design burden. Moreover, since the accessory drive control data including the respective drive patterns must be stored in the ROM 222, there is a problem that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be pressed or the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. Then, the MPU 221 determines whether or not the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is being driven by the processing of S2316, and when the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is being driven, The motor 87b is driven. As a result, while the first accessory 87 is lowered and is visible to the player, the first accessory 87 can be rotated. And since the designer of the pachinko machine 10 has only to design the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a, the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 15) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern is supported. The display data table for change is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce the effect image corresponding to the aspect. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602). According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Further, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, the display contents (to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c ( 13 is defined, a display type command for notifying the display content to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and a process for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In addition, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, if the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, In accordance with the accessory driving information, a process for generating an accessory operation start command including information on a movable accessory type to be started from now on and information on its operation mode and transmitting the command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. .

  Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604). Transmit to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36, details of the above-described command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. First, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2703).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or a display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704). If there is a number command or display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704: Yes), the held ball number command process is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The display reserve series command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the display hold ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved ball number information included in the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used for the special figure 1 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64). It is acquired in association with the number of reserved balls or the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) (S1602).

  In the process of S1602, if two or more display special figure 1 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stored ball number information is obtained from the last stored special figure 1 reserved ball number command. get. Thereby, the reserve ball number information with respect to the latest special figure 1 can be acquired. Similarly, if two or more display special figure 2 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command stored last. Thereby, the reserve ball number information for the latest special figure 2 can be acquired.

  Of the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 is acquired in the process of S2802, it corresponds to the number of reserved balls. While turning on the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and turning off the number determination flag in FIG. 1 corresponding to the number of other reserved balls (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process. When the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 is acquired in the process of S2802, the number discrimination flag of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is turned on, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the other number of reserved balls is also displayed. The number determination flag is turned off (S2803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is ON, the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and the number determination flag in FIG. 2 are referred to correspond to the number determination flag set to ON. The reserved image data is developed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls to be displayed is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 for the special figure 1 and in the second reserved display area Ds2 for the special figure 2.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that there is neither a display special figure 1 reserved ball number command nor a display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, Whether there is a display confirmation command (S2706). If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34B, details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will be described. FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variation effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S2706 (S2706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demonstration command (S2708) (S2708: Yes), the demonstration command processing is executed (S2709), and the processing returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34C, details of the demo command processing (S2709) will be described. FIG. 34C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2822).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table for demonstration is counted using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S2709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the changing effect after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed.

  In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2710: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command for display, one detailed variation pattern is executed from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which variation effects are executed in the variation time. A variation pattern is determined (S2831). The details of the notice effect performed during the change effect are uniquely determined by the detailed change pattern determined here, and the operation modes of the first to third actors 87 to 89 operated by the notice effect are uniquely determined. Determined.

  Next, for the determined details, the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). The pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the varying effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command process (S2711) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2836.

  When the process of S2836 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2837), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233e in which the variable time data is set by the process of S2834, the time of the variable effect defined in the variable display data table is measured, and the variable effect in the variable display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S2832. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2710 (S2710: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S2711: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out, reach other than front / rear reach, complete out, or special stop symbol ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 32B) is executed. Thus, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2843), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S1642 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S2604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2843, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined in the processing of S2712 that there is no display stop type command (S2712: No), then, whether or not there is an accessory operation non-execution command among the unprocessed commands. If it is determined (S2714) and there is an accessory action non-execution command (S2714: Yes), an accessory action non-execution command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the accessory action non-execution command process (S2715) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation non-execution command process. This accessory action non-execution command process executes a process corresponding to the accessory action non-execution command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114 is not executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the accessory operation non-execution command is the type of the movable accessory. And a command transmitted to the display control device 114, including information related to the operation mode that the movable accessory should have been originally executed.

  In the accessory action non-execution command, an additional data table corresponding to the movable accessory type in which the action is not executed and the action mode in which the action is not executed included in the accessory action non-execution command is specified. Then, the identified additional data table is read from the data table storage area 232b and set in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2851). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, an image corresponding to the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b is added by the process of S2851 to the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so as to be displayed.

  As described above, the additional data table set by the processing of S2851 is an image that is displayed in accordance with the display data table, in which an image that operates in an operation mode in which a movable accessory that is actually not executed is non-executed. The drawing contents necessary to be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a covered form are defined. For each movable accessory, an additional data table is provided for each operation mode prepared for the movable accessory. Prepared.

  Here, the voice lamp control device 113 operates the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 in response to the accessory operation start command from the display controller 114. When the first and second objects 88 are operated at the same time, they collide with each other and interfere with each other. Also, the operation of the second accessory 88 is not executed. In addition, even when the second action 88 is in operation, the first action 87 is not executed even if a command for starting the action of the first action 87 is received. In addition, if the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are simultaneously operated in excess of a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the supply of power is insufficient, and the pachinko machine 10 Since the movement may become unstable and cause a disadvantage to the player, when two movable actors are operating, if a new command for starting the actor action is received, The operation is not executed.

  In the display control device 114, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 do not operate simultaneously, and the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 do not operate all at the same time. As described above, the accessory driving information is defined in the display data table. However, a part of the command is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like, the first action 87 and the second action 88 operate simultaneously due to a program error, or the like, or the first action 87 and the second action It is possible that the object 88 and the third accessory 89 all operate simultaneously. Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is performed according to the operation state of the movable accessory. Not executed.

  However, it is not the actor action start command that instructs the start of the movement of the movable accessory that has been unexecuted this time, but the role that has been transmitted / received earlier is not received due to the influence of noise, etc. It can also be an object operation start command. In other words, it is sufficient that the accessory action start command for instructing the start of the action of the movable accessory not executed this time is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113. obtain. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image for conspicuous of the movable accessory that has been instructed to start the operation normally. However, since the movable accessory that should normally operate does not operate, only an image for making the movable accessory stand out is displayed, and a meaningless image is shown to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is not executed, information on the type of the movable accessory and the movable accessory Is transmitted to the display control device 114, including the information on the operation mode that should have been executed. When the display control device 114 receives the accessory action non-execution command, the display controller 114 includes the movable accessory type in which the action is not executed and the action mode in which the action is not executed included in the accessory action non-execution command. The corresponding additional data table is specified, and the specified additional data table is set.

  As a result, the third symbol display is performed in such a manner that an image that operates in an operation mode in which a movable accessory that is actually not executed is not executed is placed on an image that is originally displayed (an image that is displayed according to the display data table). It is displayed on the device 81. Therefore, even if the movable accessory instructed to start the operation from the display control device 114 is not actually operated, the movable accessory that did not operate is operating in the operation mode instructed by the display control device 114. The image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the game for the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no accessory action non-execution command (S2714: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2722). Return to processing.

  In the process of S2701, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processes in S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No) ), The command determination process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S2902), and then S2903. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by each process of S2904.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is on (S2903). It is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, with reference to the number determination flag of FIG. 1 and the number determination flag of FIG. 2, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag of FIG. A reserved ball corresponding to the number determination flag of the special figure 2 in which the on-hold image data for displaying the several symbols in the first reserved display area Ds1 (see FIG. 5) of the third symbol display device 81 is set to ON is set. The reserved image data to be displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 (see FIG. 5) of the number of reserved balls for several minutes in the second symbol display device 81 is developed (S2951). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the hold image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , The process proceeds to S2909.

  In S2909, pointer update processing is executed (S2909). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by updating the pointer 233g that designates an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. It is a process to perform.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the processing of S1781, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is discriminated (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S2983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2982, when it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2982: No) ), The process of S2983 to S2986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2987.

  In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2987). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and display setting is completed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents are expanded (S2910). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S2910 together with the pending image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S2910, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. When the contents (see FIG. 13) are defined, a display type command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, in the process of S2910, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, according to the accessory driving information, an accessory operation start command including information related to the movable accessory type whose operation is to be started and information related to the operation mode is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  After the process of S2910, the value of the time counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). If the value of the time counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has passed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2913).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off in the process of S2913 (S2913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2920 shown in FIG. 38 to determine whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the process of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the clear process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2920, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2926). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the changing effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2927), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2928).

  If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2928: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2928: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the contents are changed. Clear (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 37 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233a. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  Further, when a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a display demonstration command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 34C is performed, and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received is not received even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in this case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by a drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag after the process of S3002 (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” if the value is “0” and setting it to “0” if it is “1”. Is called. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 32B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and image rendering is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. A first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. As a result, the image display process for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image drawing process for one frame is being performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable effect is executed in accordance with the start winning prize, the main control device 110 determines the change time of the variable effect and performs display control. In the device 114, a detailed variation pattern is determined in accordance with the variation time. Further, the display control device 114 indicates whether or not the notice effect is executed by operating the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 in accordance with the detailed variation pattern, together with the operation mode. Determined by These movable accessories are driven by the sound lamp control device 113, and when the display control device 114 determines the start of operation of one movable accessory and its operation mode, the display control device 114 outputs the sound lamp. An accessory action start command is transmitted to the control device 113 to notify the movable accessory type for starting the action and its operation mode. The voice lamp control device 113 operates the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command in accordance with this accessory action start command so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. The solenoid and motor provided in the are driven.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, if the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are simultaneously operated exceeding a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the supply of power is insufficient. May occur, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may become unstable, causing a disadvantage to the player. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that when the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 operate simultaneously, they collide and interfere with each other.

  On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 do not operate simultaneously, and the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 do not all operate simultaneously. So that you are programming. However, a part of the command is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like, the first action 87 and the second action 88 operate simultaneously due to a program error, or the like, or the first action 87 and the second action It is possible that the object 88 and the third accessory 89 all operate simultaneously. Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is performed according to the operation state of the movable accessory. Not executed.

  Specifically, in the audio lamp control device 113, the number of movable actors in operation is counted by the action agent number counter 223f. Even if it receives a character action start command, it ignores the character action start command and deactivates the movable character whose operation is instructed by the character action start command. . Further, the sound lamp control device 113 has a first accessory driving flag 223c indicating that the first accessory 87 is in operation, and the first accessory 87 is in operation by the first accessory driving flag 223c. If it is determined that there is a feature driving start command for instructing to start the operation of the second accessory 88, the accessory operation start command is ignored and the second accessory 88 is set to be inactive. Let Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 has a second accessory driving flag 223d indicating that the second accessory 88 is in operation, and the second accessory 88 is in operation by the second accessory driving flag 223d. If it is determined that there is a feature driving start command for instructing to start the operation of the first accessory 87, the accessory operation start command is ignored and the first accessory 87 is set to non-operation. Let

  As a result, due to the influence of noise or the like, an error in the program, etc., all movable actors of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 can be operated simultaneously, It can suppress that the 2nd accessory 88 operate | moves simultaneously, and mutually interferes.

  On the other hand, what was received by mistake due to the influence of noise or an error in the program, etc. is not the actor action start command for instructing to start the action of the movable article not executed at this time, but the role that has been transmitted / received first. It can also be an object operation start command. In other words, it is sufficient that the accessory action start command for instructing the start of the action of the movable accessory not executed this time is normally output from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113. obtain. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image for conspicuous of the movable accessory that has been instructed to start the operation normally. However, since the movable combination that should operate normally does not operate, only an image for making the movable combination stand out is displayed, and a meaningless image is shown to the player.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command is not executed in the sound lamp control device 113, information on the type of the movable accessory and the movable combination An accessory operation non-execution command including information related to the operation mode that the object should have been executed is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the accessory action non-execution command, the display controller 114 includes the movable accessory type in which the action is not executed and the action mode in which the action is not executed included in the accessory action non-execution command. The corresponding additional data table is specified, and the specified additional data table is set.

  As a result, the third symbol display is performed in such a manner that an image that operates in an operation mode in which a movable accessory that is actually not executed is not executed is placed on an image that is originally displayed (an image that is displayed according to the display data table). It is displayed on the device 81. Therefore, even if the movable accessory that is instructed to start the operation from the display control device 114 is not actually operated, the accessory that has not been operated is operating in the operation mode instructed by the display control device 114. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the game for the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first accessory 87 includes a first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a for moving the first accessory 87 in the downward direction of the game area. A first accessory rotating motor 87b for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. The first hand 87 in the pachinko machine 10 is rotated while the first hand 87 is lowered and is visible to the player.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, in such a case, as the accessory driving control data for operating the first accessory 87, the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotating motor Both the drive pattern 87b is defined and stored in the ROM 222. Thus, in the conventional pachinko machine, at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, the designer designs both the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the drive pattern of the first accessory rotation motor 87b. This had to be a design burden. Moreover, since the accessory drive control data including the respective drive patterns must be stored in the ROM 222, there is a problem that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be pressed or the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. Then, the sound lamp control device 110 determines whether or not the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a is being driven, and when the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a is being driven, the first accessory rotation is performed. The motor 87b is driven. As a result, while the first accessory 87 is lowered and is visible to the player, the first accessory 87 can be rotated. And since the designer of the pachinko machine 10 has only to design the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a, the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 does not execute the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, the movable accessory An accessory action non-execution command including information related to the type and information related to the action mode that the movable accessory should have been originally executed is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 Based on the reception of the command for not executing the accessory operation, the image that is operated in the operation mode in which the non-executable movable accessory is actually executed is displayed according to the originally displayed image (displayed according to the display data table). The case where the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the form of covering the image to be displayed) has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when it is determined in the display control device 114 that the first accessory 87 or the second accessory 88 is operated in a certain operation mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is used. Regardless of whether or not the movable accessory is actually operated or deactivated, the display control device 114 operates the movable accessory determined to be operated in the determined operation mode. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 42 schematically shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined in the display control device 114 in the second embodiment that the first accessory 87 is operated in a certain operation mode. It is a figure.

  In the display control device 114, when the actor action start command instructing the start of the action of the first accessory 87 is output to the sound lamp controller 113, the action of the first accessory 87 is effective for the player. In order to conspicuously, not only the image 81a shining around the first accessory 87 lowered from the center frame 86 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also an image 81c imitating the first accessory 87 is displayed. Then, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while operating in accordance with the actually determined operation mode of the first accessory 87.

  At this time, the size of the image 81c imitating the first accessory 87 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is such that when the first accessory 87 actually operates, the first accessory 87 The size is set such that the image 81c imitating the one-work item 87 is hidden. That is, the size of the image 81 c simulating the first accessory 87 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the same size as the first accessory 87 or an image smaller than the first accessory 87. In this manner, an image 81 c simulating the first accessory 87 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  However, if the image 81c simulating the first accessory 87 becomes too small, the presence of the image 81c simulating the first accessory 87 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be weakened, and the player will be notified as a notice effect. There is a risk that the interest that you give will decline. Therefore, the image 81c simulating the first accessory 87 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is preferably as large as possible within a range that is hidden by the first accessory 87. Thereby, even if the player visually recognizes the image 81c imitating the first accessory 87 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without the first accessory 87 operating, the player can recognize the presence of the image 81c. Can be given to. Therefore, the notice effect can be deeply impressed with this image 81c.

  In FIG. 42, taking the first accessory 87 as an example, when it is determined in the display control device 114 that the first accessory 87 is to be operated in a certain operation mode, the third symbol display device 81 has its first Although the case where the image 81c imitating the first accessory 87 is displayed while being operated according to the actually determined operation mode of the first accessory 87 has been described, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment displays the image 81c. Even when it is determined by the control device 114 to operate the second accessory 88 in a certain operation mode, an image imitating the second accessory 88 is actually determined on the third symbol display device 81. The display is performed while operating according to the operation mode of the second accessory 88.

  The third accessory 89 performs a notice effect depending on whether or not it rotates. Unlike the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88, the third accessory 89 is always in a position visually recognized by the player. Arranged. Therefore, even if an image imitating the third accessory 89 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is always hidden behind the third accessory 89 and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, even if it is determined that the third accessory 89 is to be operated in a certain operation mode, an image imitating the third accessory 88 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is hidden.

  As described in the first embodiment, the notice effect using the movable accessory is a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main control device 110 by the display control device 114. Is determined, the details of the notice effect performed during the change effect are uniquely determined by the determined detailed change pattern, and the operation modes of the first to third objects 87 to 89 operated by the notice effect are determined. Is also uniquely determined. That is, when the detailed variation pattern is determined, the display content of the image imitating the movable accessory is also determined.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drawing content for displaying an image imitating a movable accessory is defined in the display data table for change which is a display data table for change effect. However, the drawing content for displaying the image imitating the movable accessory may be defined by the additional data table separately from the variation display data table.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the display control device 114 that the first accessory 87 or the second accessory 88 is to be operated in a certain operation mode, the sound lamp control device 113 Regardless of whether the movable accessory is actually operated or not operated, the display control device 114 displays an image in which the movable accessory determined to be operated is operating in the determined operation mode. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image imitating the movable accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hidden by the movable accessory when the corresponding movable accessory is actually operated. It is set to a size of about.

  Thus, when the movable accessory is actually operating by driving by the sound lamp control device 113, the movable accessory can be shown to the player, while the movable accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The image imitating the actor is hidden behind the actual movable accessory and is not visible to the player. In addition, the movable combination exceeding the predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment) operates simultaneously, resulting in insufficient power supply, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 becomes unstable, the first combination 87 and the second combination. In order to prevent the object 88 from operating and colliding at the same time and interfering with each other, a movable accessory is deactivated by the control of the sound lamp control device 113, and the movable accessory becomes the center. When it remains stored in the frame 86, it is an image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the non-operating movable accessory is operating in an operating mode to be originally operated. The image can be shown to the player instead of the actual movable accessory.

  Therefore, even if the movable accessory instructed to start the operation from the display control device 114 is not actually operated, the player can see the image imitating the movable accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For the player who is playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest in the game. Further, regardless of whether or not the movable accessory is actually operated, an image simulating the movable accessory may be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. When the accessory is not operated, it is not necessary to transmit the accessory operation non-execution command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Therefore, the program can be simplified.

  In addition, when a solenoid or a motor for operating a movable accessory has failed, in the first embodiment, a movable accessory having a failed solenoid or the like does not operate. However, in the audio lamp control device 113, the solenoid or the like fails. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 does not send a command for not executing the accessory operation to the display control device 114 for the movable accessory that does not operate. Therefore, in this case, the image imitating the movable accessory is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and only the image for conspicuous of the movable accessory that should originally operate is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is displayed, a meaningless image is shown to the player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the movable combination having a broken solenoid or the like does not operate, but in this case, the movable combination that has been deactivated due to the failure is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An image in which an object is originally operating in an operation mode can be shown to a player instead of an actual movable accessory. Therefore, even if a solenoid or a motor for operating an accessory is out of order, the player who plays the game while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect that enhances the interest in the game. Can do.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. The numerical values given in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can naturally be adopted.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of movable actors in operation is counted by the operating agent number counter 223f. When the operating agent number counter 223f is 2 or more, that is, at least two movable actors operate. Explains about the case where, even if a character action start command is received, the character action start command is ignored, and the moveable character whose operation start is instructed by the character action start command is deactivated. did. On the other hand, a counter for counting the number of movable accessories in operation is not provided, and the first accessory driving flag 223c indicating that the first accessory 87 is in operation and the second accessory 88 are in operation. Referring to the second accessory driving flag 223d indicating that the third accessory 89 is in operation and the third accessory driving flag 223e indicating that the third accessory 89 is in operation, the values of these flags are By knowing the number of moveable objects, if at least two moveable objects are operating, even if a character operation start command is received, the command will start ignoring the service object operation start command. A movable accessory for which an operation start is instructed by a command may be deactivated.

  In the first embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114 is not executed, the movable combination that is not executed is displayed. Regardless of the type of the object, the display control device 114 receives a command for non-execution of an action including the information related to the type of the moveable action and information related to the operation mode that the moveable action should have been originally executed. By transmitting to the third pattern, the image that operates in the operation mode in which the non-executable movable accessory is non-executed is placed on the image that is originally displayed (the image that is displayed according to the display data table). The case of displaying on the display device 81 has been described. In contrast, the third accessory 89 performs a notice effect depending on whether or not it rotates, and unlike the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88, the third accessory 89 is non- Even if it is set to be an action, it is always placed at a position visually recognized by the player. Therefore, even if an image imitating the third accessory 89 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third accessory 89 actually remains stopped. It looks like a mysterious production. Therefore, only the movable accessory (the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88 in the first embodiment) that can be visually recognized by the player by operating it is instructed to start the operation of the movable accessory. When the sound lamp control device 113 does not execute the operation of the movable accessory in spite of receiving the operation start command, information on the type of the movable accessory and the movable accessory are originally executed. It may be configured to transmit an accessory operation non-execution command including information on the operation mode that should have been transmitted to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control means 114, when receiving an accessory operation non-execution command from the sound lamp control device 113, can be operated to make a movable accessory (first combination in the first embodiment described above) visible. Only for the object 87 and the second accessory 88), the image of the movable accessory is covered with the originally displayed image (the image to be displayed according to the display data table) in the non-executable operation mode. It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, an image of a movable accessory that has not been visually recognized by the player due to the non-execution of the operation is originally displayed in the non-executable operation mode (an image displayed according to the display data table). Since it can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the form of covering, the player can enhance the interest in the game by visually recognizing the image of the movable accessory.

  In the first embodiment, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the operation of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114 is not executed, information on the type of the movable accessory In addition, the case has been described in which the accessory operation non-execution command including the information related to the operation mode that the movable accessory was supposed to be executed is transmitted to the display control device 114, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. The display control device 114 stores the movable accessory type indicated by the accessory operation start command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the operation mode of the movable accessory. When the action of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command received from the display control device 114 is not executed, a command that simply notifies that the action of the movable accessory has not been executed is displayed. You may transmit with respect to the control apparatus 114. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is not executed based on the movable accessory type stored in the display control device 114 and the operation mode of the movable accessory. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an image that operates in an operation mode in which the movable accessory is not executed on an image that is originally displayed (an image that is displayed according to the display data table). May be. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to generate the movable accessory operation non-execution command including various information as in the first embodiment, so that the operation of the movable accessory is not executed. The voice lamp control device 113 can quickly notify the display control device 114. Further, the display control device 114 does not prepare an image of the movable accessory to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after receiving the accessory action non-execution command, but in advance on the third symbol display device 81. An image of the movable accessory to be displayed was prepared, and when the command for notifying that the operation of the movable accessory was not executed was received from the sound lamp control device 114, the operation was immediately disabled. An image that operates in an operation mode in which the movable accessory is not executed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the display control device 114 stores the movable accessory type indicated by the accessory operation start command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the operation mode of the movable accessory, and the voice lamp control device. In 113, when the action of the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command received from the display control device 114 is not executed, the accessory action non-execution command including information on the type of the movable accessory is displayed. It is transmitted to the control device 114, and the display control device 114 determines whether the stored movable accessory type matches the movable accessory type included in the received accessory action non-execution command. Only when they match, based on the movable accessory type stored in the display control device 114 or indicated by the accessory action non-execution command and the operation mode of the movable accessory. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the image that operates in the operation mode in which the movable accessory is not executed on the image that is originally displayed (the image that is displayed according to the display data table). May be. Alternatively, the display control device 114 stores the accessory type indicated by the accessory operation start command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 stores the role received from the display control device 114. When the action of the movable accessory indicated by the physical action start command is not executed, information on the type of the movable accessory and information on the operation mode that the movable accessory should have been originally executed are included. The accessory action non-execution command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 stores the movable accessory type and the movable accessory type included in the received accessory action non-execution command. Are matched with each other, and only when they match, is indicated by the accessory action non-execution command or stored in the display control device 114, and A form in which an image that is operated in an operation mode in which a non-executable movable agent is not executed is overlaid on an image that is originally displayed (an image that is displayed according to a display data table) based on the operation mode of the movable object. May be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the display control device 114, when the stored movable accessory type does not match the movable accessory type included in the received accessory action non-execution command, the display control device 114 does not execute the accessory action. There is a high possibility that the movable accessory indicated by the command has not been instructed to start the operation, and the voice lamp control device 114 has a high possibility of transmitting the accessory action non-execution command due to a malfunction due to the influence of noise or the like. . Therefore, in this case, the third symbol display is performed in such a manner that an image that is operated in an operation mode in which the non-executable movable accessory is non-executed is placed on an image that is originally displayed (an image that is displayed according to the display data table). By preventing the display from being performed on the device 81, it is possible to prevent a strange effect from being performed during the changing effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation timing of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 is uniquely determined in accordance with the detailed variation pattern determined in the display control device 114 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For at least a part of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89, for example, for the first accessory 87, at a random timing during the period in which the changing effect is performed regardless of the detailed change pattern. The timing of the operation may be determined by lottery of the display control device 114 so as to be operated. Thereby, the player can play the game while expecting the first action 87 to always operate during the period in which the changing performance is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced. .

  In each of the embodiments described above, as the movable combination, the first combination 87 which is a disk-shaped movable combination provided on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 in front view, and the front view of the third symbol display device 81 in front view. A second accessory 88 that is a plate-like movable accessory provided on the side and a third accessory 89 that is a cylindrical movable accessory provided on the right side of the front of the third symbol display device 81 are illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to any gaming machine having a plurality of movable accessories.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first accessory 87 is provided with the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation solenoid 87b, and the accessory driving control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. In the case where only the drive pattern of the first action vertical movement solenoid 87a is defined and the first action vertical movement solenoid 87a is driven according to the drive pattern, the first action rotation motor 87b is driven. Explained. On the other hand, for example, three or more driving means (solenoid, motor, etc.) are provided in one movable accessory, and only the driving pattern of one driving means is defined as the accessory driving control data stored in the ROM. When one driving means is being driven according to the driving pattern, the other two driving means may be driven. As a result, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to design the driving pattern of one driving means, and the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of one driving means is defined and stored in the ROM as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame on which a drawn image is to be developed Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although the case of S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 26 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special control 1 of the main control device 110 is subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start processing (S1308). The special figure is set so that the value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 18) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted to the device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. In this case, S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 26 are omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and an accessory operation start command for instructing the start of operation of the accessory, You may comprise so that it may transmit to a control apparatus. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command received directly from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, from the display control device to the sound lamp control device, You may transmit the command which instruct | indicates the output of each audio | voice and lighting of a lamp | ramp, and the accessory operation start command which instruct | indicates the operation | movement start of a movable accessory. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command and the accessory operation start command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the sound lamp control device 113, a display type flag and an accessory operation start flag are generated, and based on the display type flag. Then, the voice data may be read from the voice data storage area 222a and set in the reproduction voice data storage area 223d, or the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start flag is based on the accessory action start flag. A solenoid or a motor provided in the movable accessory may be driven so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the object operation start flag.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning at the first entrance 64, the winning at the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are each held up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, in some parts of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the second entrance 640 are: The display may be displayed in numbers or in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern) that is different from the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. The lamp may be separated from the first symbol display device 37. A light emitting member such as a light emitting member may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the fluctuating effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  A gaming machine comprising a plurality of movable accessories provided in a game area and a driving means provided for each movable accessory for operating a corresponding movable accessory, wherein the plurality of movable For each accessory, a setting means for setting the operation of the movable accessory, a determination means for determining the operation status of the plurality of movable accessories, and the setting means can be operated for one movable accessory. When set, based on a determination result by the determination unit, a determination unit that determines whether the operation of the one movable combination is to be non-executed, and the one movable combination by the determination unit A non-execution means for non-execution of driving of the drive means corresponding to the one movable accessory set to be operated by the setting means when the operation of the object is to be non-executed; A gaming machine A1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of movable combinations are provided in the game area, and each movable combination is operated by a driving means provided for each movable combination. The operations of the plurality of movable accessories are set by the setting means for each movable accessory. Here, the operation state of the plurality of movable accessories is determined by the determination means. If the setting means sets the action for one movable accessory, whether or not the action of one movable accessory should be made non-executable based on the determination result by the determination means Is determined by the determining means. Then, when the determining means is in a situation where the operation of one movable accessory is not to be executed, the driving of the driving means corresponding to the one movable accessory set to be operated by the setting means is not Not executed by the execution means. Therefore, there exists an effect that a several movable accessory can be operated appropriately.

  In the gaming machine A1, the determination means does not execute the operation of the one movable accessory when it is determined by the determination means that at least a predetermined number of movable combinations are operating. A gaming machine A2 that is determined to be in a power situation.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that at least a predetermined number of movable combinations are in operation when the setting means sets the operation for one movable combination, the determination means Thus, the operation of one movable accessory is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the movable combination exceeding the predetermined number at the same time. Therefore, when the movable combination exceeding the predetermined number operates, a large amount of electric power is consumed by the driving means for operating each movable combination. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in the operation of the gaming machine due to power shortage.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the plurality of movable combinations include a first movable combination and a second movable combination that is operated separately from the first movable combination, the first movable combination When the combination and the second movable combination operate simultaneously, the first movable combination and the second movable combination interfere with each other, and the determination means When it is determined by the setting means that the operation is performed on the first movable accessory, the determination means determines that the second movable accessory is in operation. The game machine A3 is characterized in that it is determined that the operation of the first movable accessory is not to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory operate at the same time, the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory interfere with each other. When it is determined by the setting means that the first movable combination is operated by the setting means, if the determination means determines that the second movable combination is operating, the first It is determined by the determining means that there is a situation in which the movement of the movable accessory is not to be executed. Thereby, there exists an effect that it can suppress that a 1st movable combination and a 2nd movable combination operate | move simultaneously, and mutually interfere.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 includes first control means having the setting means and second control means for controlling the driving means, and the first control means and the second control means are separately provided. The first control unit is configured to transmit the setting information to the second control unit when the setting unit is set to operate on one movable accessory. A gaming machine A4, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. The setting means is provided in the first control means, and the driving means is controlled by the second control means configured separately from the first control means. Further, the first control means is provided with a transmission means, and when the setting means is set to operate one movable accessory, the setting information is transmitted to the second control means by the transmission means. Is done. Thereby, a part of the setting information is broken due to the influence of noise or the like, and the second control unit may drive the driving unit based on the erroneous setting information to operate the movable accessory. However, the determination means determines whether or not the operation of one movable accessory is to be non-executed based on the operation status of the movable accessory, and determines that the operation of one movable accessory is not executed. If there is a situation to be performed, the drive of the drive means corresponding to the one movable object set to be operated by the setting means is not executed by the non-execution means. Even if a situation occurs in which the operation of the movable combination is set, there is an effect that a plurality of movable combinations can be operated appropriately.

  The gaming machine A4 includes display means for displaying an effect image as the game progresses, and the first control means includes effect image setting means for setting the effect image to be displayed on the display means, and the setting means The game machine A5 is characterized in that the operation of the movable accessory is set for each of the plurality of movable accessories in accordance with the effect image set by the effect image setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect image displayed on the display means on which the effect image is displayed as the game progresses is set by the effect image setting means provided in the first control means. And the operation | movement of a several movable accessory is set by the setting means for every several movable accessory according to the effect image set by the effect image setting means. Therefore, the game machine can execute an effect in which the effect image displayed on the display means and the operations of the plurality of movable accessories are integrated, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the setting means provided in the first control means sets the operation for one movable accessory in accordance with the effect image displayed on the display means, the setting information is transmitted to the transmission means. Is transmitted to the second control means, so that part of the setting information is broken due to the influence of noise or the like, and the second control means drives the driving means based on the erroneous setting information and operates the movable accessory. It may happen that If the driving means is driven based on incorrect setting information and the movable combination is operated, an operation that does not match the effect image displayed on the display means may be performed on some of the movable combination, and the display There is a risk that the sense of unity of the effects performed by the means and the plurality of movable accessories will be impaired. However, the determination means determines whether or not the operation of one movable accessory is to be non-executed based on the operation status of the movable accessory, and determines that the operation of one movable accessory is not executed. If there is a situation to be performed, the drive of the drive means corresponding to the one movable object set to be operated by the setting means is not executed by the non-execution means. Even when a situation in which the operation of the movable accessory is set occurs, the plurality of movable accessories can be appropriately operated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to maintain a sense of unity of effects performed by the display means and the movable accessory.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game apparatus includes a display unit that displays an effect image in accordance with the progress of the game, and an effect image setting unit that sets the effect image to be displayed on the display unit. In accordance with the effect image set by the effect image setting means, the operation of the movable accessory is set for each of the plurality of movable accessories, and the non-execution means is operated by the setting means. Non-execution information for transmitting non-execution information to notify the non-execution to the effect image setting means when the drive of the drive means corresponding to the one movable accessory set to be non-execution A transmission means, wherein the effect image setting means, when receiving the non-execution information from the non-execution information transmission means, displays an image representing a state in which the one movable accessory whose operation is not executed is operated. Above Gaming machine B1 which is characterized in that the setting to be displayed on the shown means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect image displayed on the display means for displaying the effect image in accordance with the progress of the game is set by the effect image setting means, and the operations of the plurality of movable accessories are set by the effect image setting means. In accordance with the image, it is set by the setting means for each of the plurality of movable accessories. Thereby, since the effect which united the effect image displayed on a display means and operation | movement of a several movable accessory can be performed in a game machine, a player's interest can be heightened. Here, the determination means determines whether or not the operation of one movable accessory should be made non-executable based on the operation status of the movable accessory, and the operation of one movable accessory is not executed. In the situation that should be set, the drive of the drive means corresponding to the one movable object set to be operated by the setting means is not executed by the non-execution means. At this time, in the display means, there may be a case where an effect image corresponding to the operation of the one movable accessory is displayed as one movable accessory being operated. If it is executed, the sense of unity of the production may be impaired. On the other hand, when the non-execution means does not execute the driving of the driving means corresponding to one movable accessory and the operation of the one movable accessory is not executed, the non-execution means for notifying the non-execution is notified. Execution information is transmitted to the effect image setting unit by the non-execution information transmission unit. Then, when receiving the non-execution information, the effect image setting unit performs setting for displaying on the display unit an image representing a state in which one movable accessory whose operation is not executed is operated. Thereby, although one movable accessory itself does not actually operate, an image representing the state in which the one movable accessory is operated is displayed on the display means, so that it is possible to maintain a sense of unity of the production. effective.

  In the gaming machine B1, the plurality of movable combinations includes a third movable combination that can be visually recognized by the player by driving the corresponding drive unit, and the effect image setting unit includes the non-execution information transmission unit. When the non-execution information is received, if the movable combination whose operation is non-executed is the third movable combination, an image representing the state in which the third movable combination has been operated is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that setting for display is made.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third movable accessory becomes visible to the player by driving the corresponding driving means, and the movable accessory whose operation is not executed is the third movable accessory. In such a case, setting for displaying an image representing the state in which the third movable accessory is operating on the display means is performed by the effect image setting means. Even in the case of non-operation, the movement of the movable accessory is not executed until the movable accessory is always visible to the player, and an image representing the state in which the movable accessory is operated is displayed on the display means. When displayed, the inoperable movable accessory is actually in a state of being visually recognized by the player, so there is a discrepancy between the actual action of the movable accessory and the display on the display means. There is a risk that it appears to be a direct performance. On the other hand, in the case of the third movable combination that is invisible to the player in the case of non-operation, the third movable combination is invisible because the third movable combination is deactivated. If it is left as it is, the effect image displayed on the display means becomes strange because the effect image on the premise that the third movable accessory is visually recognized is displayed on the display means. . On the other hand, only when the third movable accessory is not executed, an image representing the state in which the third movable accessory is operated is displayed on the display means. Even in the case where is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to produce an effect with a little uncomfortable feeling on the display means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game apparatus includes a display unit that displays an effect image in accordance with the progress of the game, and an effect image setting unit that sets the effect image to be displayed on the display unit, and the plurality of movable roles The object includes a third movable accessory that can be visually recognized by the player by driving the corresponding driving means, and the setting means includes the plurality of effects according to the effect image set by the effect image setting means. For each movable accessory, the operation of the movable accessory is set. When the setting means sets the operation of the third movable accessory, the effect image setting means The gaming machine C1 is configured to display an image representing a state in which the movable accessory is operated on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect image to be displayed on the display means for displaying the effect image as the game progresses is set by the effect image setting means. Further, the operation of the plurality of movable accessories is set by the setting means for each of the plurality of movable combinations in accordance with the effect image set by the effect image setting means. Thereby, since the effect which united the effect image displayed on a display means and operation | movement of a several movable accessory can be performed in a game machine, a player's interest can be heightened. Here, the third movable accessory becomes visible to the player by driving the corresponding driving means. When the operation of the third movable accessory is set by the setting means, an image for displaying on the display means an image representing the state in which the third movable accessory has been operated is displayed by the effect image setting means. Is set. Thereby, when the operation of the third movable combination is set, an image representing the state in which the third movable combination is operated is displayed on the display means. Even if the action of the object is not executed and the player cannot actually see the third movable accessory itself, the player can operate the third movable accessory through the image displayed on the display means. Can be visually recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to maintain a sense of unity in the production even if the operation of the third movable accessory is not executed.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the operation of the third movable accessory is set by the setting unit, the effect image setting unit is configured to display an image of the third movable accessory displayed on the display unit. A game characterized in that an image of the third movable accessory is set to be displayed on the display means so that the third movable accessory becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the third movable accessory in a state where the third movable accessory is in operation. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation of the third movable accessory is set by the setting means, the image of the third movable accessory displayed on the display means is displayed in the state where the actual third movable accessory is operated. It is set by the effect image setting means so that the image of the third movable accessory is displayed on the display means so that the third movable accessory becomes difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, when the actual third movable accessory is operating, the image of the third movable accessory displayed on the display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. You can watch the movement of the movable accessory. Therefore, while the image of the third movable accessory is displayed on the display means, even if the actual third movable accessory is operating, the effect image displayed on the display means and the third movable accessory are displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to entertain the player with a sense of incongruity in the production that combines the actions of the objects.

  A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory provided in a game area and a plurality of drive means for operating the movable accessory, wherein a drive mode of some of the plurality of drive means Based on the drive mode stored in the storage means, the first drive control means for controlling the drive of the part of the drive means, and the one controlled by the first drive control means. And a second drive control means for controlling the drive of the other drive means based on the drive status of the drive means of the unit.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the movable combination provided in the game area is operated by a plurality of driving means. Among the plurality of driving means, some of the driving means are driven by storage means. Is controlled by the first drive control means on the basis of the drive mode stored in. On the other hand, the other drive means are controlled by the second drive control means based on the drive status of some of the drive means controlled by the first drive control means. In recent years, with the complexity of the operation of the movable accessory, the number of drive means provided for operating the movable accessory has increased. However, when the number of drive means is large, for all the drive means When designing the drive mode, it is necessary to consider the relationship with each drive unit, and the design becomes complicated. With this, it is not necessary to design the drive mode for all the drive units. Since it is sufficient to design the driving mode of the driving unit, it is possible to facilitate the design of the driving mode of the driving unit when the movable accessory is operated by the plurality of driving units. In addition, since the storage means only needs to store the drive modes of some of the drive means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity required for the storage means accompanying an increase in the drive means.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, and D1, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, and D1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and the gaming machine F2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, and D1, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of movable accessories in a game area or the like, and perform various effects while operating each movable accessory (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2003-208867). 2012-85862).
In the future, it is expected that the number of movable accessories will increase, but if more than a predetermined number of movable accessories are operated simultaneously, a large amount of power will be consumed by the drive device for driving the movable accessories. As a result, there was a risk that the operation of the gaming machine would become unstable due to insufficient power supply. In addition, each movable accessory tends to increase in size, and depending on the combination of movable accessories to be operated, there is a possibility that the operations interfere with each other, such as collision.
The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately operating a plurality of movable accessories.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
87 1st hand (movable hand, 1st mobile hand, 3rd mobile hand)
87a First action vertical solenoid (drive means, some drive means)
87b First accessory rotating motor (driving means, other driving means)
88 Second character (movable character, second movable character, third movable character)
88a Second action vertical solenoid (drive means)
89 Third character (movable character)
89a Third accessory rotating motor (driving means)
113 Sound lamp control device (second control means)
114 Display control device (first control means)
222 ROM (storage means) of voice lamp control device
S2209, S2210 (determination means)
S2209: No, S2211: No (non-execution means)
S2216 (Non-execution information transmission means)
S2302 (first drive control means)
S2316, S2317 (second drive control means)
S2603 Display setting processing (effect image setting means)
S2910 (setting means, transmission means)

Claims (2)

A plurality of movable accessories provided in the game area, a driving means provided for each movable accessory for operating the corresponding movable accessory, and a display for displaying an effect image as the game progresses A game machine comprising: means and an effect image setting means for setting the effect image to be displayed on the display means ;
For each of the plurality of movable combinations, setting means for setting the operation of the movable combination;
A determination means for determining an operation state of the plurality of movable accessories;
Whether the operation of the one movable accessory should be made non-executable based on the determination result by the determination device when the setting device is set to operate on the one movable accessory. Determining means for determining
When the determination means is in a state where the operation of the one movable accessory should not be executed, the driving means corresponding to the one movable accessory set to be operated by the setting means is driven. A non-execution means for non-execution,
The plurality of movable objects are difficult to see from the player when not driven, and the first movable combination that is visible to the player at a position covering a part of the display means by driving the corresponding driving means. Including things,
The effect image setting means is configured such that when the operation of the first movable combination is set by the setting section, the first movable combination is operated in a state where the first movable combination is operated by driving of the corresponding drive section. wherein the position of the display means, a game machine, characterized that you set to display an image corresponding to the operation of the first movable won game covered by movable means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine .